Home

KROSS Operation Guide

1. Drum Track function The Drum Track does not start Is the DRUM TRACK button turned on lit p 77 You pressed the DRUM TRACK button but the drum track pattern did not start Is the DRUM TRACK button blinking Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger The drum track pattern will start when you play the keyboard or receive a note on p 78 e Did you select a pattern that does not contain data e Could 000 Off be selected as the pattern p 77 78 If the drum track pattern fails to start in Combination mode is the Output setting appropriate If the drum track pattern fails to start in Sequencer mode are the Input and Output settings appropriate p 78 79 Is MIDI Clock G MIDI gt BASIC set to Internal or Auto gt p 99 In the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page is ARP SS DT All Off checked p 98 Drum Kits The drumsample s pitch does not change You have left the Assign check box unchecked and want to play the drumsample at the adjacent right a semitone lower but the pitch does not change e Ifyou ve selected a drum program in Program mode and then want to use the Global mode DRUM KIT page to edit the drum kit you should use the P PITCH gt BASIC page to set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter the DRUM KIT page PG p 15 Effects Effects are not audible Have you selected effect program 000 No Effec
2. Program A Program B Split Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard Velocity Switch Velocity Switches cause different Programs to respond depending on the velocity how hard you play the notes Program A Soft dynamics Velocity Switch Keyboard playing dynamics velocity switch between different programs On the KROSS you can use a different Program for each of up to sixteen Timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex setups Program B Strong Keyboard playing ProgramA Program B Program D Strong Keyboard playing Program C Soft dynamics Example B and C D are split In the lower keyboard range A and B are layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes gradually This lets you change a split into a keyboard crossfade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Keyboard X Fade keyboard crossfade As you play from low notes to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Program A Program B 45 46 Playing and editing Combinations Creating Splits and Laye
3. Controlling KROSS s tone generator from an external MIDI device When you wish to play or control the KROSS s tone generator from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer etc use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector of KROSS MIDI OUT y Qs maT MIDI keyboard Controlling two or more external MIDI tone generators from the KROSS You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple MIDI devices KROSS ia TU enon patch bay MIDI IN M MIDI tone generator Playing and editing Programs About the KROSS s Programs You can also use the cursor buttons lt P to switch Programs are the basic sounds of the KROSS you can play categories and edit them in Program mode 3 Turn the SELECT dial to select the program that you You can play them by themselves layer them together in want to play Combinations or play a different Program on each of the 16 Play the keyboard to hear the sound MIDI tracks either from the internal sequencer or from Tip You can also select programs by using the cursor external computer based sequencers buttons A V or the value
4. e PIANO USER E PIANO SELECT O FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU a G3 23 24 Playing and editing Programs Category Index number bank number Type of sounds 000 C016 048 C064 SYNTH LEAD 049 G063 069 g3 082 Lead synth 000 C065 039 C104 F SYNTH PAD 040 G089 053 g2 103 Pad motion synth 000 C105 035 D012 z A GUITAR 036 G016 071 93 029 Acoustic electric guitar BASS 000 D013 043 D056 Electric acoustic synth 044 G033 060 g4 039 bass 000 D057 070 D127 Drums amp percussion DRUM SFX 071 G048 133 gd 057 hits SFX vocoder etc Sounds saved in the User category USER 000 127 U000 U127 With the factory settings contains initialized programs Index number With the factory settings the 512 preload programs of banks A D the 256 GM2 preset programs of the GM banks GM g d and the 9 GM2 preset drum programs are organized into the PANO DRUM SFX categories Within each category the programs are assigned an index number starting with 000 The 128 initialized programs of bank U USER are assigned to the USER category Category Program sounds are organized into the 12 categories listed in the table above A program category icon is shown in the upper left of the display The USER category icon is shown to the left of the PLANO DRUM SFX icon Bank number The bank number
5. Controllers Timbre1 Routing DrumTrack Tone Adjust Parameters Step Sequencer Arpeggiator Timbre2 Parameters z i r Timbre3 Parameters Timbre Master i C Program J Insert Effects Master Effects Insert Effects Parameters 1 5 FX Control Bus Timbre4 Timbre16 Parameters Effects 1 2 AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R 44 Playing and editing Combinations A suggested approach for editing First select the program that each timbre will use and set each timbre s MIDI channel to Gch global MIDI channel and its Status to INT so that it can be played from the keyboard Next create any desired keyboard or velocity switch layers or crossfades between the different Timbres After this adjust the volumes of the Timbres and set up any other Timbre parameters as desired To add finishing touches to the sound set up the Insert and Master Effect as desired These effects can be different from those associated with the individual Programs in Program mode if desired In addition you can make arpeggiator and drum track settings and controller settings to create the finished Combination Note You can use a function to copy effect and arpeggiator settings from a program see page 96 of the Parameter Guide So
6. 67 Using the arpeggiator while you play 67 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 0eeeeeeeees 67 Arpeggio pattern selection and operation settings 68 Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode 45 69 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes 70 Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations 71 Creating a user arpeggio pattern ceeeee 72 About user arpeggio patterns ccccee eee eeeeeeee ees 72 Editing a user arpeggio pattern eee cece eee eee eee ees 72 Regarding arpeggiator synchronization 75 Key Sync parameter ec eeee eect ee eee eee eee eeee ees 75 Table of Contents Drum Track function ee006 77 Performing with the Drum Track function 77 Using the Drum Track function in Program mode 6 77 Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode 78 Drum Track function settings secceceseees 78 Drum Track function settings in Program mode 605 78 Drum Track function settings in Combination mode 79 Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode 60 79 Synchronizing the Drum Track function 80 The Trigger Sync parameter cc cee eseeeeeeeeeeaaees 80 Synchronization with song stop oaeee eneee 80 Slave operation cccceeeeseeeeeceeeseae
7. ccceeeeeeeeeeeanes 28 Comparing the unedited sound cceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 28 Saving your edits cece eee e cece eee eee eee eeeeeeae ene 28 Detailed Editing with Programs sceeeee 29 Before you start editing ccc cece ee eee ee ence eeeaees 29 An overview of the edit pageS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 30 Basic oscillator settings ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 Creating time varying changes LFO and EG 004 33 Diverse modulation settings AMS and AMS mixer 34 Controlling Pitch ccc cece cece cece cece eeneeeeeeneenaes 35 Using Filters ins sag ero a r ned nreetent anes 36 Using the Amp section cccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Making controller assignments 00ececeeeeeeeeeeees 39 Arpeggiator settings 0 ccc ce eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeee 39 Drum Track settingS o n eeens eerren seeen 39 Using the step sequencer ccccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 Effets os neee aeee E E E ESEE 39 Automatically importing a Program into Sequence mode 39 Table of Contents Playing and editing Combinations 41 Playing combinations eeceeseeseeees 41 Selecting Combinations ccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 41 Combination categories and numbers 0eeceeeeeeees 42 Using controllers to modify the sound 0 42 Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequ
8. ye lFx R MP EJ EENT TFX RER 1 2 6 Bae 48 221 5 2 60 Q sas St MasteringLimiter TCO 3 3 E Q 31 Orange PHASE TB 4 4 DB 000 No Effect TE 35J of 5 GG 883 Stereo Limiter 2 In the Effect area select each insert effect that you want to use You can press the ENTER button and choose from a list Tip You can use the Copy Insert Effect function to copy the effect settings from another effect The Swap Insert Effect function lets you exchange for example insert effects 1 and 5 3 In the Effect On Off area turn the insert effect on Each time you press the ENTER button the insert effect will turn on or off If this is Off the result will be the same as if 000 No Effect is selected the input sound will be output without change 4 Specify the chain setting If the Chain check box is selected the insert effect will be chained in series Set the Chain To parameter to 2 If 2 is selected the insert effects will be connected in series in the order of IFX1 IFX2 5 Access the P PFX ROUTING gt MIXER page Pan 8 Bus Send1 Send2 FX Control Bus ESAT TSS S gt Pre a iei k Si derse do aor cose ane 1 2 17 yo ofr Off J C264 C L R 1 12752 127 B off J ca64 CI L R 1 12752 127 B off J 0464 GJ LAR 1 12752 127 B Off 6 Set the Pan 8 Bus Bus Select FX Control Bus Send1 and S
9. 63 64 Using Effects 3 For MFX1 and MFX2 select a master effect for each The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert effect see Insert effects Note Double size effects can be selected only for MFX1 see Double size effects 4 Press the On Off button to turn the master effect on The master effect will alternate on off each time you press the button If it is Off the output of the master effect will be muted 5 Use Return1 and Return to adjust the output level of the master effects Note For each effect s Wet Dry setting the Wet value is the output level of that effect The Dry sound will not be output This value is multiplied by the return setting with Return 127 as lt 1 0 to determine the actual output level of the master effect 6 Select the MFX1 or MFX2 page and edit the effect parameters in each page Please see step 7 of Insert effects Effect settings for a combination or song In Combination and Sequencer modes you can specify how each timbre or track is routed to the insert effects master effects and total effects The procedure for adjusting settings is similar in each mode Here we ll explain the procedure for Combination mode Routing 1 Access the C FX ROUTING gt BUS page BUS IERE EUs EENDE MIXERS ST PAEO 57 ExcITR 57 Greq PT ST PE ge aap aoc el F aa4s6 782901 alamia hI TIMERE 01 Eus AR 2 Use Bus Bus
10. Diverse modulation settings AMS and AMS mixer Using AMS AMS Alternate Modulation Source lets you modulate program parameters using controllers EG or LFO as the modulation source Extremely creative types of modulation are possible for example you can use a single controller to simultaneously modulate multiple parameters or you can use an EG to modulate an LFO s frequency and then use that LFO to modulate a filter AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the assignable modulation sources in KROSS including e Controllers of the KROSS itself such as the modulation wheel the pitch bend wheel and SW 1 2 e Incoming MIDI controllers e Modulators such as the Filter Pitch and Amp EGs the LFOs or the AMS Mixers Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed depth amount etc of how AMS will control the modulation A number of frequently used modulation routings such as using the modulation wheel or the pitch bend wheel to vary the pitch are provided as additional dedicated routings separate from AMS Note that not all AMS sources may be available for some modulation destinations For details on alternate modulation and AMS please see below e Alternate Modulation Sources AMS on page 281 of the Parameter Guide e Creating Vibrato on page 35 e Pitch EG on page 35 e Filter EG on page 37 e LFO modulation on page 37 e AMS Pan on page 32 of th
11. FOOT LS hd te cone e MG 880 NEw AUDIO SONG Auto B Note On v LOOP A 60 BE B 06 00 03 FUNC UNDO 14 on If you add a check mark to LOOP to turn it on the playback will loop To specify the loop region set the point where looping will start point A and end point B Note The interval between points A and B will be at least three seconds amp It s not possible to record while LOOP has a check mark Nor is it possible to add a check mark to LOOP during recording Setting the current time location as a point There s a convenient function that lets you directly specify the current time location as one of the points Move the cursor to A or B and press the ENTER button during playback the current time location will be specified as a point ENTER AUDIO RECORDER SETUP Note If you use this method to specify the time location of a point the location will be specified with an accuracy of within one second 89 90 Audio recorder Importing or exporting WAVE files Importing You can import a WAVE file into the audio recorder and play it or overdub onto it The following files can be imported File format WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM e Sample bit depth 16 bit Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz stereo files Number of characters in file name The first eight characters are shown Note Since 44 1 kHz WAVE files will be converted into 48 kHz as they are i
12. C TIMBRE P mno osc lt PiroH Scales TIMBRE 0 1 gt Force OSC Mode Q GER OSC Select GB oscti 2 aad pail PRG D1 Je 2 a I ae A See ee 10 2 m3 m 4 5 mE a Adjust these settings in the C TIMBRE gt OSC page Force OSC Mode If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically set this either to Mono or Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically Normally this should be set to PRG so that the sound will play as set by the original Program For details please see Force OSC Mode on page 77 of the Parameter Guide OSC Select If the timbre is using a Program where the Oscillator Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to onlyOSC1 only OSC1 will sound or onlyOSC2 only OSC2 will sound Normally this should be set to OSC1 amp 2 47 48 Playing and editing Combinations Portamento If the Program uses portamento but you d like to disable this for the current Combination set this parameter to Off Conversely if you want to force the portamento to be on or just to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 The portamento will change to use the newly specified time Normally this should be set to PRG Pitch settings TIMBRE 0 1 gt Transpose Detune 8008 Use BPM Adj Bend Range PRG 11 ee Se 1 12 E 1S 0 0 0 46 0 46 46 0 46 0 46 0 0 0 0
13. MM asic our ETERA MIDI Channel EE Note Receive v LL Convert Position lt Pre MIDI r Local Control On MIDI Clock B Internal MIDI clock settings Local Control on off Global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is the basic MIDI channel of the KROSS keyboard and controller information is transmitted on this channel The sound generator will produce sound mainly in response to receiving messages on this channel e This setting is specified by the G MIDI gt BASIC page MIDI Channel parameter Local control Local control specifies whether the keyboard and controllers will directly play and control the sound generator of the KROSS Turn local control on if you re playing the KROSS by itself or if you re playing and controlling an external MIDI device unidirectionally while you play the KROSS If you have made connections and settings so that the performance data from the KROSS is being sent through an external MIDI device and returned back to the KROSS such as when the KROSS is connected to a computer turn local control off to prevent notes from being triggered in duplicate e This setting is specified by the G MIDI gt BASIC page Local Control On parameter MIDI Clock synchronization The KROSS can use its own internal tempo or synchronize to external clocks from either MIDI or USB The best general purpose setting is Auto This combine the functionality of Internal and External MIDI USB s
14. Timbre Status MIDI Channel Assign 2 3 INT 02 A 15 Off Gch A e Ifthe arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound the timbre s that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI channel in this case 01 Since the MIDI Channel of timbres 2 and 3 is set to 02 it will not sound Timbre 15 is set to Gch but since the Status is Off it will not sound e Notes from any MIDI channels that are assigned to a timbre will trigger the arpeggiator In this case these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch global MIDI channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to timbre 15 Gch Timbres 2 and 3 will be sounded by arpeggiator A Since the Status of timbre 15 is Off it will not sound e Since the Status of timbre 16 is Off it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that causes timbres 2 and 3 to sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination BASS 016 Jazzy Guitar Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel G MIDI gt BASIC MIDI Channel is set to 01 Select combination BASS 016 Jazzy Guitar turn the ARP button on and play e Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 6 7 8 and 15 and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbres 4 5 and 9 When you press any note of the entire keyboard the drum programs of timbres 6 8 will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A When you play the keybo
15. e File format WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM e Sample bit depth 16 bit e Sampling frequency 48 kHz Number of characters in file name The first eight characters are shown Export procedure 1 In the audio recorder setup window select the audio song that you want to export 2 Choose the Export function to access the dialog box 3 If you want to rename the file access the text dialog box and enter a name 4 If you want to adjust the audio level of the song when exporting it specify Level Adjust 5 Press the OK MENU button to execute the export function The selected audio song will be exported as a WAVE file The progress of execution is shown by a progress bar in the display The WAVE file will be created in the KORG KROSS DATA folder of the SD card Note This may take some time depending on the length of the song During the export procedure you can cancel by pressing the ABORT FUNCTION button Convenient functions for playback and recording Adjusting the volume Select the Set Play Level function and adjust the level as follows 1 Set the Level as desired Adjusting the volume You can use the following methods to adjust the volume of imported data or of an already recorded audio song If the volume of the imported data is too loud so that it drowns out the performance of the KROSS or if multi track recording has caused the volume to overload so that no more can be overdubbed it is
16. 5 If at step 3 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the Compare function will now be referencing take 1 6 If at step 4 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the Compare function will be referencing take 2 In this way the Undo function lets you recall the previous recording or the previous state of event editing Note If you edit while Undo is on the check mark selected the check mark will be cleared That musical data now becomes the musical data that will be selected when Undo is off Global mode The Compare function is not available in Global mode Audio recorder When using the audio recorder you can use Undo to return to a previously recorded state You can step back through multiple takes You can also redo In the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP dialog box press the UNDO PAGE button Basic Information Basic operations Selecting and executing functions FUNCTIONS Write Program Solo Setting CCompare Auto Song Setup CLOSE rs v oK The functions provide commands that are specific to each page such as Write save or Copy The available functions will depend on the selected page For example the functions in Program mode let you write save the settings or let you perform convenient editing procedures such as copying settings between oscillators or effects or a Sync function that lets you edit two EGs together 1 Press the FUNCTION button The funct
17. Media unavailable Meaning You selected a media source that does not allow writing Media write protected Meaning The audio recorder or Media mode is attempting to write data to media that is write protected e Disable the write protect setting of the media and execute the audio recorder operation or the command once again Memory full Meaning When editing a song or track in Sequencer mode the total data of all songs has used up all of the sequence data memory and further editing is not possible To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Meaning While realtime recording in Sequencer mode there is no more free memory to accommodate the recorded data so recording has been forcibly halted To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain the amount of free memory Memory Protected Meaning The internal program combination song drum kit user arpeggio pattern is protected In Global mode turn off write protect and execute the write or load procedure once again Error messages Error and confirmation messages MIDI data receiving error Meaning While receiving MIDI System Exclusive data the format of the received data was invalid for example because the size of the data was incorrect No data Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the file contained no events No media Meaning When using the audio recorder or when executing a Media mod
18. Note When you ve finished recording clear the LOOP Loop All Tracks check box and set Recording Setup to the Overwrite setting that you normally use In addition access the S LOOP TONE gt LOOP page check Track Play Loop for track 01 and set the Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to 001 When you play back track 01 will repeatedly play the first measure Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer Based on the note data it receives from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator can generate a wide range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns You can use two arpeggiators simultaneously For more about the arpeggiator please see page 67 The Drum Track plays a variety of drum patterns using the drum program that you ve assigned to the desired track For more about the Drum Track please see page 77 57 58 Sequencer You can select the drum program that you want and specify how it will start The step sequencer uses the drum program of track 16 You can use buttons 1 16 to intuitively create drum loop patterns and play them For more about the step sequencer please see page 81 Recording System Exclusive events Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device or the parameter changes produced when you edit a track parameter or effect parameter can be recorded in real time on an
19. Notes P A C E Transmitted received when Global G MIDI FILTER page Program Change Aftertouch Control Change Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global G MIDI BASIC page MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for Ext MIDI Ext USB 2 Valid if the Global G MIDI OUT page setting ARP Controllers MIDI Out is set to Control Change The number shown here is the default setting 3 RPN LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO 122 Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION Yes x No KO ad KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi city Tokyo 206 0812 Japan 2013 KORG INC
20. OSC Oscillator Mode to Drums P BASIC VOICE NOTE ON SCALE A osc O Single O Double OMENA Voice M Poly O Mono POLY r Legato r Single Trigger 3 Select a drum kit in the P OSC gt DKit page 0SC 1 Octave 0187 Transpose 00 DRUM KIT IE GGCINT Basic Kit 1 4 Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator For a drum kit set Octave to 0 8 Creating time varying changes LFO and EG Using LFOs You can use the cyclic change produced by the LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to modulate numerous aspects of the sound Each Program has two LFOs LFO1 and LFO2 There is also a single Common LFO shared by both Oscillators While LFO1 and LFO2 are separate for each voice the Common LFO is shared by all voices in the Program This makes it useful when you want all of the voices to have an identical LFO effect You can use these LFOs to modulate many different Program parameters including e Pitch for vibrato e Filters for wah effects e Volume for tremolo e Pan for auto panning The LFOs can modulate many other parameters in addition to those listed above Using the basic LFO 1 Access the P OSC LFO gt 1 WAV page OSC Waveform PP OSC OSC lt 3 1 LF01 ELE Phase 000 Offset 00 ae Shape 68 AN AMS R Off 00 Fade 66 Start Y KeySync Delay 66 2 Select the oscillator OSC that you want t
21. Tie 5 oes AC adapter CI lol p Included a DC plug to an AC outlet Turning the power on 1 Turn the KROSS s VOLUME knob VOLUME all the way to the left so that the volume is down If any external equipment such as a 1 monitor amplifier is connected lower their volume as well and then turn off their power On the rear panel of the KROSS hold down the power button until the power Gd turns on Keep holding down the button until the display lights up 2 The display will show the model name and software version amp With the factory settings the auto power off function of the KROSS is enabled immediately after you start up the following message will appear indicating the time until the power will turn off automatically If you disable the auto power off function this message is not displayed see Auto power off function on page 16 Auto Power Off is enabled The system will automatically shut down after being idle for 4 hours Turn on the power of the external equipment that s connected to the KROSS s AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks such as a monitor amplifier Use the KROSS s VOLUME knob and the volume controls of your external equipment to set the volume to a suitable level 15 16 Setup Turning the power off amp When you turn off the power unsaved data will be lost Be sure to save
22. Your computer does not recognize an SD card that was formatted by the KROSS e Does the SD card reader support SDHC cards Error messages Error and confirmation messages Error messages Error and confirmation messages A Aborted Meaning Execution of the function was cancelled Are you sure Meaning This message asks you to confirm execution To execute press the OK button To cancel press the CANCEL button Audio recorder data error Meaning An error occurred while managing the audio song recording data e No further recording is possible Execute the Adjust Audio Level function with Level 00dB on the recorded data and you ll switch to a new audio song so that you can continue recording Audio song full Meaning Another audio song cannot be created because there are already 200 audio songs Switch to a different SD card Auto Power Off is enabled The system will automatically shut down after being idle for 30 minutes 1 hour 4 hours Meaning The auto power off function is enabled If the KROSS has not been played or operated for a specified length of time the power will turn off automatically e Ifyou want to disable this function or change the time setting go to the GLOBAL gt PREF page and set the Auto Power Off parameter Use the Write Global Setting function to save the setting C Can t calibrate Meaning Calibration could not be performed correctly Try again Can t upd
23. off regardless of the state of the DRUM TRACK button Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Combination mode MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Program mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel that s specified by the Drum Track Prog MIDI Ch default channel 10 which can be found on the G MIDI gt OUT page Note data etc of the Drum Track program will be transmitted Note MIDI transmission of the pattern data is enabled if Drum Track Prog MIDI Out is selected The default setting is off unselected The Drum Track program does not transmit or receive program changes Drum Track function settings in Combination mode MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Combination mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel that s specified by the Output C DRUM TRACK gt CHANNEL setting of each combination Set this to match the MIDI channel of the timbre you ve specified for the drum program If the ti
24. on page 86 Status Trigger Indicates the state of the audio recorder such as recording playing or stopped Level Meter The INPUT level meter shows the level of the external audio that s being input to the KROSS The OUTPUT level meter shows the level of the sound being output from the L R jacks the sound of the KROSS the external audio input and the playback of the audio recorder During recording this will show the recording level e Audio Song Selects a song e Auto Specifies how recording will be started automatically see Specifying how recording will start on page 89 LOOP Repeatedly plays the A B region Undo Returns to a previous take or the most recent take Stop Reset Rec Control Control the audio recorder Recording and playing audio Preparations Recording and playing audio The audio recorder can record what you play on the keyboard of the KROSS or it can play an external audio signal from LINE IN or MIC IN Let s begin by recording the sound of your playing a program In a later section we ll explain how to record an external audio signal Preparations Insert an SD card into the SD card slot see Inserting an SD card on page 21 A If the SD card is being used by the KROSS for the first time you ll need to format it in GLOBAL MEDIA mode see Formatting SD card on page 108 Note When using an SD card with the KROSS for the first time KORG
25. p 104 e User arpeggio pattern p 104 e User template songs PG p 140 e For details on writing to internal memory p 103 Please see the following pages for more information about saving Saving a MIDI song p 60 Saving to SD card p 102 Note On the KROSS the action of writing into internal memory is called Writing and the action of saving to an SD card device is called Saving Assigning a name renaming You can edit the name of an edited program combination song drum kit or arpeggio pattern For additional details please see Editing names on page 105 13 14 Introduction to the KROSS Turning the power on off The KROSS can be powered either by an AC adapter or by using batteries Connecting the AC adapter 1 Make sure that the power is turned off Make sure that nothing is shown on the display and that the LEDs are unlit 2 Connect the DC plug of the included AC adapter to the power supply jack DC9V on the KROSS s rear panel he You must only use the included AC adapter Using any other AC adapter might cause malfunctions 3 Connect the AC adapter to an AC outlet amp h Be sure to use an AC outlet of the correct voltage for your adapter 4 Use the cord hook of the KROSS to fasten the AC adapter cord so that it will not be unplugged accidentally Power supply jack DC9V Power button Cable hook _fa fa
26. FX Control Bus on page 199 of the Parameter Guide 65 66 Using Effects amp If you want the edited settings to be saved in the KROSS be sure to execute the Write function 7 If you want the Input settings of Global mode to be used in each mode add a check mark to G SET If you want to use individual input settings in Program Combination and Song modes clear this check mark Dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic modulation Dmod lets you use MIDI messages or the KROSS s controllers for realtime control of specific effect parameters Another way to control effect parameters is to use MIDI Tempo Sync which allows the LFO speed of a modulation effect or the delay time of a delay effect to be synchronized to the tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer see Dynamic modulation Dmod and Tempo Synchronization on page 198 of the Parameter Guide Arpeggiator function Using the arpeggiator while you play The arpeggiator is a function that automatically generates arpeggios patterns of individual notes derived from a chord Most arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard The chord you played on the keyboard is sounded as an arpeggio broken chord The KROSS s arpeggiator is also polyphonic and can produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play on the keyboard These functions le
27. In this example we ll assign a drum program to track 01 and create the following one measure drum phrase Hi Hat F 3 P Snare E3 p Bass Drum C3 gt 1 Create a new song and specify a drum program for track 01 Use Track Select to select track 01 and verify that you hear a drum program see page 54 2 Access the SEQ gt REC page In Recording Setup specify Loop Loop All Tracks and set it to M001 M001 With this setting measure 1 will be recorded repeatedly The newly recorded data will be added at each pass 3 Set REC Resolution to D 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt W button The metronome will sound a two measure count down and then recording will begin 5 As shown in the musical example printed above start by playing the C3 note of the keyboard to record the bass drum for one measure 6 Next play the E3 note of the keyboard to record the snare for one measure and then the F 3 note to record the hi hat 7 Press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording 8 Play back the result and listen to the drum performance that you recorded Press the START STOP gt I button When you ve finished listening press the START STOP gt W button once again to stop playback 9 If you re not satisfied with your performance you can select the Undo function to return to the state prior to recording Record again from step 4
28. Once you ve turned on Hold for the Program the function is controlled on a note by note basis according to settings within the Drum Kit 3 Access the DRUM KIT gt VOICE page 4 For each key set the Note Off Enable Note Off Receive parameter as desired If this check box is not selected notes will be held and the sound will continue even after the key is released If it is checked the key will not be held If you turn off Hold in the Program no keys will be held regardless of their Note Off Enable Note Off Receive setting Controlling effects for each key Drum Kits have their own built in mixers For each key you can control the Insert Effects bussing Master Effects sends and pan Bus settings for each key For example you can make settings so that the snare is sent to IFX1 the kick to IFX2 and the other sounds to L R 1 Access the P FX ROUTING gt BUS page 2 Make sure that the DKIT SET check box is checked When Use DKit Setting is on the Program will use the Bus Select and Effects Send settings for each key of the Drum Kit When Use DKit Setting is off the Program will ignore the Drum Kit s Bus Select and Effects Send settings 3 Access the DRUM KIT gt VOICE page 4 Use the Bus Select parameter to send drum sounds through their own Insert effects or to the L R outputs If you like you can send each note to its own Insert effect or to the individual audio outputs in addition to the
29. Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack Portamento Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter controls how long it will take the pitch to change As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no portamento You can turn Portamento on and off via SW1 or SW2 by assigning them to Porta SW 65 Cr Sos moo gt PORTA N osc lt 1 PORTAMENTO v r Fingered Mode B Rate Time 823 35 36 Playing and editing Programs Using Filters The filters allow you to diminish or emphasize specified frequency areas of the sound The tone of the sound will depend significantly on the filter settings The basic filter settings including the routing type cutoff frequency and resonance are set on the P FILTER gt BASIC page Filter Type Filter Routing Resonance osc lt om A MP EAEC I O EG IST FoTckTRe IG Parallel I Ss r Bypas s Trim Freq 18 Resonance EE Out f3 G High Pass r Bypass Trim Freq 99 Resonance 66 Out Filter
30. s Use Program s Scale check box Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by Scale Scale Type Song s Scale 99 100 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data Data used by the KROSS The KROSS accesses the following folders and files on the SD card Folder and file structure DOS files 1 KROSS DATA Data folder 2 NEWFILE PCG 3 NEWFILE SNG songs 4 NEWFILE MID gt IMPORT WAV AUDIO 1 DATA folder This is the folder that the KROSS uses to save load data Use the MEDIA gt FILE page and UTILITY page to work with these files You cannot create folders below the DATA folder Folders created by a computer or other device will be ignored 2 PCG files These files contain KROSS programs combinations drum kits global settings including favorites and user arpeggio pattern data The data whose check box is selected in the Save dialog box will be saved 3 SNG files These files contain song data for the Sequencer mode of the KROSS 4 MID files These files contain Sequencer mode songs that have been saved as Standard MIDI Files SMF Existing SMF data can also be loaded 5 Export WAVE files These files contain audio recorder songs that have been exported as WAVE files Files can be exported in the following format Export File format WAV file File bit depth 16 bit Sampling frequency 48 k
31. 5 OUTPUT L MONO R 51 52 Sequencer Playing back Playback methods In order to play back song data in the sequencer you must first load song data into the KROSS Let s start by loading and playing the demo song data For details please see Listening to the demo songs on page 20 of the Quick Start Guide 1 Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode The SEQ gt MAIN or SEQ gt PROG page will appear If this is not displayed press the EXIT button three times 2 Use Song Select to select the song that you want to play back You can also select a song by using the ENTER button the cursor buttons A V and the value dial However if there is no song you can t make a selection using the VALUE controllers Location Song Select Tempo Mode Tempo 2S ea ais Peo Tax RE CARP 05 i rrr d 125 08 55 q Auto r LOOP F Multi R a i ao MiS ISRA CA ee Se E a ee ee ee TO 2 am J an ae SelB Track Program Category Track Select 3 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button Song playback will begin The location indicator towards the upper left of the display shows the currently playing measure and beat 4 During playback you can press the START STOP gt E button to stop playback If you press the START STOP gt I button once again playback will resume from where you stopped For details on the
32. 78 Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode Selecting a combination and turning the Drum Track function on off 1 Press the COMBI button to enter Combination mode and select the desired combination see Selecting Combinations on page 41 2 Press the DRUM TRACK button to turn the Drum Track on off For details please see the Program mode sections Playing and stopping the Drum Track and Changing the tempo Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program Unlike its functionality in Program mode the Drum Track function in Combination mode does not have its own dedicated track timbre The program that plays the Drum Track pattern will use the timbre that you specify 1 In the COMBI gt PROG page select the timbre that you want to use for the drum track and then select the Drum Track program In the following illustration we ve selected timbre 5 for use by the drum track PIANO 864 Piano Trio v i 4TIMBRE 04b Status R INT ORUM SFX 666 E PERZI 1 ee 3 a ee aa ed 2S 1d 1S I luau ee Dre te SCOR CORCOCO MOM ComCO mom cm ARPT EP 2 Specify the MIDI channel of the drum track timbre Be aware that if another timbre uses the same MIDI channel that timbre will also be played C TIMBRE Tor so PITH SpeLe 4TIMBRE 04 gt MIDI Channel Bank Select MSB 666 when EX2 Bink Select LSB 000 ee 9 16 ee a 2 19 1
33. Kross Grand Piano OSE 1 osce DRUM STEP TRACK SEQ Play 8Pla Play Play vol FRR vol 127 vol 127 Vol 127 2 Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the Vol parameters of oscillator 1 or 2 the Drum Track and the step sequencer and adjust their volume Note For single oscillator programs oscillator 2 will not be available for editing Note If the Hold Balance function is selected changing any of the volume values will simultaneously affect the other volume values as well The overall volume balance will be preserved This is convenient when you want to adjust the overall volume Mute Select Play Mute for oscillator 1 or 2 the Drum Track or the step sequencer and press the ENTER button to change the setting Solo e Select the Solo Setting function and press the OK MENU button to access the dialog box Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the item that you want to solo and press the ENTER button to turn solo on off Pressing the CLEAR PAGE button will turn off solo for all items If Exclusive Mode is on only one item at a time will be soloed To return to the PROG gt MIXER page press the DONE MENU button Comparing the unedited sound Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE button will recall the last saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing For details please see Compare Und
34. PROGRAM l Arpeggiator A Drumsample 2 Drumsample 3 Drumsample 4 TIMBRE6 PROGRAM TIMBRE14 PROGRAM l Arpeggiator B TIMBRE 7 PROGRAM TIMBRE 15 PROGRAM pa Drum Track TIMBRE 8 PROGRAM TIMBRE 16 PROGRAM ARPEGGIO PATTERN Step Sequencer Preset Pattern PO 4 Preload User Pattern SEQUENCER MIDITRACK 1 16 Insert Master Effect TRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACK 9 PROGRAM TRACK2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 PROGRAM MEDIA MODE TRACK3 PROGRAM TRACK11 PROGRAM Tracka procran TRACK 12 paocan PE TRACKS PROGRAM TRACK13 PROGRAM Arpeggiator A PCG SNG TRACK6 PROGRAM TRACK 14 PROGRAM Arpeggiator B TRACK7 PROGRAM TRACK15 PROGRAM jam Drum Track TRACK8 PROGRAM TRACK16 PROGRAM Step Sequencer DRUM TRACK PATTERN Preset Drum Track Pattern Basic Information Basic operations Basic operations After you ve turned on the KROSS here s how to perform basic operations such as selecting modes and pages Selecting modes In order to use a particular function on the KROSS you must first select the appropriate mode e Press one of the front panel mode buttons to enter the corresponding mode COMBI button Combination mode PROG button Program mode SEQ button Sequencer mode GLOBAL MEDIA button
35. Specify the combination category By default the category of the first program will be specified WRITE To Specify the save destination You can only select the U USER combination bank By default an ascending number starting at U000 will be selected Press the OK MENU button to save your combination The COMBI button will light up you ll be in Combination mode and the combination that you saved will be selected If you decide not to save the combination press the CANCEL FUNCTION button The dialog box will close ending the procedure You will return to the state of step 2 with that program selected Pressing the blinking LAYER button will also close the dialog box and end the procedure You can press the LAYER button again to reproduce the settings of step 4 25 26 Playing and editing Programs Quick Split A typical example of a split is when you play a piano or electric piano with your right hand in the upper region and a bass sound with your left hand in the lower region As an example here s how to create this sound 1 In Program mode select a piano program Please see steps 1 2 of the Quick Layer section on page 25 Note The procedure will be smoother if you first select the sound that you want to play in the upper region of the keyboard Press the SPLIT button The button blinks The QUICK SPLIT dialog box will appear Play the keyboard and you ll hear the split
36. This specifies the level that is reached after the decay time has elapsed and is held until note off Increasingly negative values settings will lower the sustain level and increasingly positive values settings will raise it Release Adjusts the EG release times of the filter and amp simultaneously This specifies the time from note off until the sound disappears Normally negative settings will shorten the release time and positive settings will lengthen it 27 Playing and editing Programs Saving your edits Internally one controller modifies several parameters Saving the program does not save the values of these controllers it saves the edited state of the various parameters When the program has been written the previously edited values will become the new reference values meaning that the saved sound will be reproduced when these controllers are at 00 Adjusting the volume balance The sound of a program consists of up to two oscillators that are played mainly from the keyboard one Drum Track that automatically plays a rhythm section and one step sequencer The volumes of the oscillators and the drum track can be adjusted in the PROG gt MIXER page Note There s also a mute function which individually silences these and a solo function which mutes all sounds other than the specified one 1 Access the PROG gt MIXER page PIANO 466
37. UGO InitPro CANCEL Note For more about Initialize please see page 109 Use Category to specify the category of the program combination For the banks that you can specify please see step 3 Select the save destination in WRITE To For limitations on the save destination please see step 3 If you want to rename the program combination press the text edit button The text edit dialog box will appear Enter the program combination name see Editing names on page 105 When you ve finished entering the name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box To execute the Write operation press the OK MENU button If you decide not to execute press the CANCEL FUNCTION button or the EXIT button About the Tone Adjust settings that are saved Tone Adjust parameter controls two or more program parameters simultaneously For example Filter Amp EG Attack Time controls a total of six program parameters The value of a Tone Adjust parameter indicates the amount of change that is applied to the value of each program parameter it s affecting When a Tone Adjust parameter is at zero the program parameters it controls will function according to their original settings Raising or lowering the value of a relative parameter will indirectly raise or lower the value of these program parameters Program mode The settings of Tone Adjust parameters are automat
38. appropriate function you can increment or decrement the program number in steps of one This lets you change Programs without using your hands which is great for quick Program changes in live performance situations There are two ways of doing this by assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down or to Value Inc Dec Each of these is suited to a particular application as described below e Program Up Down When performing with the usual MAIN page or the favorites list open e VALUE Inc Dec When performing with the sound select list open Assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down Assigning the foot switch to Program Up or Program Down lets you directly control Program changes from the foot switch For most situations this is the more straightforward method To set this up 1 Connect a foot switch to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH input Use an optional PS 1 pedal switch Connections Using an SD card 2 Access the G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page elas ke ee ODIO IN FOOT Foot Switch amp Pedal Damper Foot SW Assign 2 REET Foot Pedal Assign Off Damper Polarity KORG Standard Foot SW Polarity lt KORG Standard Proceed as follows Press the GLOBAL MEDIA button to enter mode Press the MENU button to access the function list Use the V PAGE and A PAGE buttons to select G INPUT CTRL and press the OK MENU button Use the V PAGE and A PAGE buttons to select
39. as well as perform functions such as undo and create a new audio song Use the buttons located below the display to operate the recorder FUNC FUNCTION button This button shows the functionlist where you can use functions such as creating a new sound renaming deleting exporting or adjusting the level see page 8 UNDO PAGE button Shows the UNDO dialog box Here is where you can step back to an earlier recording take You Il also use this button for the Redo function which brings back a recorded take see page 89 Stop Reset PAGE button This is the stop button It stops playback or recording of the audio song When you stop the recorder will return to the stored location If you press locate while stopped you ll return to the beginning 0 00 00 of the song REC Control MENU button This is the record button It controls record pause and record start The functionality of the button will depend on the current state In each state pressing this button will perform the following actions I f While stopped Press the button to enter the record pause state P When shown Press the button to start recording F Recording Press the button to switch to playback Locate During recording or playback pressing the Stop Reset PAGE button will stop and take you back to the location where you started recording or playing except if you started from pause When stopped pressing the Stop Reset 14
40. dialog box you can also adjust this setting in the INPUT CTRL gt AUDIO IN page of each mode For a program combination or MIDI song that uses G SET the upper left of the screen will show the G SET indication selected By clearing this selection you can adjust individual settings P INPUTZCTRL AUDIO IN lt CONTROLLERS S rG Select O Line Mic Pan C064 J _ me J R COS Level 100 Play Gain 37_ Bus LZR Sendi 668 Send2 049 FX Control Bus Off Connecting foot controllers If you connect an optional damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal you ll be able to control the KROSS using your feet Connecting a damper pedal When you press the damper pedal the notes you ve pressed will be sustained so that they will continue even after you take your hands off the keyboard This is also called a sustain pedal it has the same function as the damper pedal of an acoustic piano If the optional Korg DS 1H damper is connected you ll be able to take advantage of the half damper effect where the depth that you press the pedal will vary the amount of damper that s applied If any other type of pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch In Combination or Sequencer mode you can also select settings so that the damper will be applied to some sounds but not to other sounds 1 Connect a Korg DS 1H damper pedal to the DAMPER jack 2 Set the polarity of the switch In the G I
41. the G INPUT CTRL gt Foot page and press the OK MENU button 3 Set Foot Switch Assign to either Program Up or Program Down If you choose Program Up the next program number up will be selected each time you press the foot switch If you choose Program Down the next program number down will be selected each time you press the foot switch Use the cursor A Y buttons to select Foot Switch Assign Press the ENTER button to access the list and use the cursor A V buttons to select Program Up or Program Down Press the ENTER button to confirm your choice 4 Set the Foot Switch Polarity to match the polarity of the pedal you ve connected If you ve connected the optional PS 1 or PS 3 pedal choose KORG Standard Use the cursor V button to select the parameter and press the ENTER button The setting will alternate on off each time you press the button Now the foot switch will step through the Programs one by one 5 If you want to preserve this setting even when the power is turned off be sure to Write the data see page 104 6 Press the PROG button to enter PROG gt MAIN and press the foot switch to change the Program Note This setting also works in the same way for selecting combinations or favorites Note With the Program Up Down method you can t switch programs while the sound select list is open Use the method explained below in Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc Dec
42. 0 Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre Adjust these settings in the C TIMBRE gt PITCH page Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e In split type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone Note If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the relationship between the notes and drum sounds will change Scale selection Use a Program s Scale Scale Type timbre scale and overall scale This specifies the scale for each timbre Adjust these settings in the C TIMBRE gt SCALE page If you check Use Program s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres where this parameter is not checked will use the Scale setting C TIMBRE P mip gt OSC gt PITCH SCALE Scale Type 2 EETEDMEM Sei Key C_ Random TIMBRE O1 gt v Use Program s Scale Ce ee m5m 5m ee ee fee Tr Peek Foe Por i Delay You can set some Timbres so that they don t sound immediately at note on This can create cool effects and more dramatic layers Adjust these settings in the C ZONE DELAY gt DELAY page You can specify the delay
43. 1 16 buttons to register the sound to that button Add to Favorite function You can also register a favorite by executing the Add to Favorite function in Program mode or Combination mode Instead of step 2 described above press the FUNCTION button to access the function list use the A PAGE Y PAGE buttons to select Add to Favorite and press the OK MENU button to execute Use steps 3 and 4 described above to register the favorite Modifying an existing favorite registration In this method you specify the favorite number and change the currently registered sound to a different sound This method is convenient if you already know the sounds you want and the order that you want to register them for example piano in A01 and organ in A02 so that you can step through the favorites and change them consecutively 1 Select a favorite whose sound you want to change See Recalling a favorite sound 2 Press the ENTER button to access the EDIT FAVORITE dialog box The bank LED and the 1 16 button you ve selected will start blinking Favorite No aa Select A Internal O External MIDI Ch B1G PraChg 0a tri r Send Bank Select 2 MY ASONG2 _ MSB 00A LSB aaa PROG COMEI DK nego Sound Setting Prog Combi Select Note If you decide not to make the change press the EXIT button 3 Select a sound In the same way as usual when selecting a sound use the CATEGORY dial the SELECT
44. 1 I Gch 2 2 165 6 7 8 9 4 11 12 13 14Gch 16 3 Access the C DRUM TRACK gt CHANNEL page Specify the drum track s MIDI channel Output Set this to match the MIDI Channel of the timbre that you specified in step 2 CHANNEL Lelio 13 14 1S I5 11 12 13 14Gch 16 d a Sn a a a 4 Access the C DRUM TRACK gt PATTERN page Use Pattern No to select the Drum Track pattern Note 000 If you select Off it will not be possible to turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF button on 5 Press the DRUM TRACK button to verify that the pattern plays correctly The method of triggering will depend on the Trigger settings Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Program mode Starting stopping the drum track 1 Access the PDRUM TRACK gt PATTERN page P DRUM TRACK PATTERN lt PROGRAM A OGT Half Time 1 AL Shift 00 Trigger Mode Y v Latch 2 Trigger Mode specifies how the Drum Track pattern will be triggered Start Immediately When you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it on the LED will light up and the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting It will stop when you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it off Wait KBD Trigger When you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it on the LED will blink and the Drum Track pattern will wait to start When you play the keyboard or receive a MIDI note on the Drum Track pattern will start according to the S
45. 50 Saving your Favorites ccecceseescescees 50 Sequencer eessssssssssosesosss 51 OVerVieW snn n E S 51 About the KROSS s Sequencer cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 Sequencer mode structure cc ccc cee eseee eee eeeeeeeees 51 Playing back ccccceccseceeccecceseeeees 52 Playback methods ccssecceeeeeeeee eee eeneeeeenees 52 Recording ccccecceccccccscccccscececceces 54 Preparations for recording ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 54 Recording MIDI in realtime ccc cceee eee eeeeeee eens 56 Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer 57 Recording System Exclusive events 00cceeeeee sneer es 58 Song editing ccccccccsceccccscescescecees 59 SONGi AS oes wie hae i cp edate Maas ete E E NERENS 59 Tacks tained tvatsentivs dot ch E E 59 Saving your MIDI song sccecceceececees 60 Using Effects ciscicesecsisvecessceses 61 An overview of the KROSS s effects 004 61 Effect IO serosa stead d tA eee ed 61 Effects in each mode 0 eece cence eee ee eneeeenaee es 61 Routing and effect settings cececcesceees 62 Effect settings for a program ccc ccc c eee eeeee eee ee ees 62 Effect settings for a combination orsong 0eeeeee eee 64 Effect settings for audio input cccceeeeeeee eee ees 65 Dynamic modulation Dmod eee008 66 Arpeggiator function
46. Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc Dec This lets you use the Assignable Foot Switch to duplicate the functions of the front panel cursor A V buttons This method is convenient if you want to open the Sound select list and switch programs while viewing the program or combination menu 1 Follow steps 1 2 under Assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down above 2 At the top of the page set the Foot Switch Assign parameter to Value Inc or Value Dec 3 Now the foot switch will act just like you re pressing the front panel cursor A V buttons Note The foot switch will work like this for the entire KROSS not just when the Sound select list is open Connecting a foot pedal If you connect an optional EXP 2 foot controller or XVP 10 expression volume pedal to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack you can use it to apply modulation to sounds or effects or to adjust the overall volume This pedal will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global Media mode Like the Assignable Foot Switch described above the Foot Pedal can be used for many different functions including e Master Volume e Channel Volume Pan or Expression e Assignable sound modulation as several different AMS or Dmod sources e Effects Send level control e Use various KROSS controls Modulation wheel etc 1 Connect an optional XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the ASSI
47. EDIT gt mode Arpeggio Type As Played Octave Motion R Up Steps per Beat x1 Tone Mode 43 Fixed __ Mode Q DEFER TIENTS FIXED ca Gisetur 3 For each Tone specify Fixed Note No Access the FIXED Setup dialog box Here you can assign a different drumsample note number of the drum kit to each fixed note For this example set Tone No and Fixed Note No as follows Tone No Fixed Note No B2 kick D3 snare F 3 closed hi hat A 3 open hi hat sea ee SETUP gt D Arpeggio Type G As Played Octave Motion R Up Steps Tone Mode 4 Fixed _ Mode G Trias Lpesegoeegogegegs The drumsample corresponding to each note number will differ depending on the drum kit It s convenient to use the keyboard to audition the drum sounds select Fixed Note No and press the ENTER button and then press a key to enter the note number To confirm press the ENTER button once again and then press the EXIT button 4 Access the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page one Gere GOE SETUP gt EDIT MaR E2 Fh 5 Enter the kick Tone00 Set tone 00 B2 of Step 01 and 09 6 Enter the snare Tone01 Set tone 01 D3 of Step 05 and 13 7 Enter the closed hi hat Tone02 Set tone 04 F 3 of Step 01 03 05 09 11 and 13 8 Enter the open hi hat Tone05 Set tone 05 A 3 for Step 07 and 15 9 If Mode Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger All T
48. Global Media mode For a summary of each mode please see the About the KROSS s modes section on page 9 Note The mode that s currently selected is shown by the mode switch that s lit up Note If you press the GLOBAL MEDIA button twice the previously selected combination program or sequencer mode will be selected If you hold down the EXIT button and press the GLOBAL MEDIA button Media mode will be selected immediately Selecting pages and tabs One screen of displayed information is called a page To access the page you want you can use the PAGE and PAGE buttons or you can press the MENU button and choose from the page menu e Make sure that the desired mode is selected For this explanation we ll use Combination mode as an example Using the PAGE buttons to move between pages e You can move between pages by pressing the PAGE or PAGE button Using the page menu to access different pages The page menu shows a list of the pages and tabs within each mode Select the desired page and tab from this list 1 Press the MENU button The page menu will appear The page where you were immediately before pressing the PAGE button is indicated by a diamond shaped symbol to the left C TONE ADJ gt C TIMBRE b C ZONE DELAY gt C MIDI FILTER gt TABSP a v OK 2 Press the PAGE button or the PAGE button to select a page As an example here select C ZONE DELAY 3 Press the TA
49. In order for the note mappings to match the keyboard the Oscillator s Octave setting needs to be 0 8 All Drum Kit Programs should have this setting already If you re unsure you can check this yourself 1 Go to the OSC1 Setup tab of the PPOSC gt DKit page With a setting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the Drum Kit sound map will be incorrect 2 Set the GLOBAL gt BASIC parameter Key Transpose to 00 Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled Before you start editing go to the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page and look in the Memory Protect section Make sure that Drum Kit is not checked if so you won t be able to make any edits Drum Kits may be used by more than one Program When you edit a Drum Kit all Programs that use that Drum Kit will be affected To avoid changing the factory voicing you may wish to copy Drum Kits to empty locations in the USER banks before editing 93 Using Drum Kits Editing a Drum Kit Basic Editing 1 Select the Program that you wish to use while editing the Drum Kit Access the DRUM KIT gt DS 1 page Press the GLOBAL MEDIA button Press the MENU button to access the menu use the A PAGE or V PAGE buttons to select DRUM KIT then press the OK MENU button Ifa different page is shown use the A PAGE button to select the appropriate page N Drum Kit Select KEY Assign DRUMSAMPLE 1 A E A E E Mono 192 SD Big Rock E Tran
50. KROSS AUDIO and DATA folders will be created automatically to make the card usable by the KROSS he Never remove the SD card during recording or playback Doing so may temporarily destabilize the KROSS Recording the performance of the KROSS 1 Press the PROG button to enter Program mode and select the program that you want to play from the keyboard and record 2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP button to open the window 3 Select the audio song that you want to record e Ifthere is no recorded data on the SD card the display will indicate NO AUDIO SONG Simply proceed to step 4 e To select a different song move the cursor to the audio song and use the VALUE dial etc to select the song you want You can press the ENTER button and choose from a list e Ifyou want to newly record a song prepare a new song see Preparing a new audio song on page 88 4 Press the Rec Control II MENU button to enter the record standby condition AUDIO RECORDER gt Il button blinking red AUDIO RECORDER MCU RSS a Free 2h sem ie SETUP n ame 0 00 SS ew eS San nog DIO auto off LOOP A 0 00 00 B 0 00 03 FUNC UNDO 14 ou FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU EJ C 5 Press the Rec Control amp Jt MENU button or the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button to start recording AUDIO RECORDER gt II button lit red Note The procedure here is for when Auto Auto Rec Start is Of
51. Load Save Template Song Loads a song template into the song or saves a song as a template see page 55 Copy From Combination Copy From Program Copies the settings of the specified combination program to the settings of the song that s currently selected Copy From Song This command copies all of the settings and musical data from the specified song to the song that s currently selected Rename song Renames the selected song You can enter up to 24 characters Delete Song This command deletes the currently selected song FF REW Speed This allows you to set the speed at which fast forward or rewind will occur when you press the FF gt gt button or REW 44 button GM Initialize This command transmits a GM System On message to the Sequencer mode resetting all MIDI tracks to the GM settings Set Song Length This command changes the length of the specified song Tracks Event Edit Here you can edit individual events of MIDI data Erase Track This command erases the data from the specified track Copy Bounce Track The Copy Track command copies musical data from the copy source track to the specified track The Bounce Track command combines the musical data of the bounce source and bounce destination tracks and places the combined data in the bounce destination All musical data in the bounce source will be erased Erase Measure This command erases the specified type s of musical data from the sp
52. PAGE button will take you to the beginning 0 00 00 of the song If you want to move the location use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select Time Location and press the ENTER button the A VW symbols are shown beside the value Use the cursor buttons A V or the VALUE dial to specify the location and press the ENTER button to move there You can t change the location during recording or in the record pause state Foot switch You can use a foot switch to switch between play play pause or record record pause Foot SW Assign Audio Recorder Start Pause Audio Recorder REC Start Stop see page 20 Audio setup window In the audio recorder setup window you can adjust settings for the audio recorder e Press the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP button to open the window AudioTake Time Location Status Trigger Level Meter AUDI i RECORDER SH E Freep 6am NEW Amem m SS SS ee e d p s T a AGA NO AUDIO SONG Auto B Off LOOF A 0 00 00 B 0 00 02 Audio Song Undo Rec Control Stop Reset e Audio Take If you have not yet recorded this will indicate New When you record the left side indicates the currently selected take and the right side indicates the number of multi track recordings You can use Undo to go back to a previous recording e Time Location Indicates the location within the audio song From the left this shows hours minutes and seconds Please see the preceding section Locate
53. SEQ INST Instrument settings Step sequencer settings such as accent H MOD Summary of the edit pages and swing BUS Bus assignments from each timbre to To perform detailed editing you ll need to access an edit the insert effects page in the display S SEND Send amounts from each timbre to the For details on how to access each mode and page please see ROUTING master effects l l Basic operations on page 11 IFX son effect type selection and chain settings Page Tabs Main content MIXER Post insert effect routing settings MAIN Select and play a combination IFX1 PROG Select a program for each timbre and IFX2 COMBI set its status C IFX IFX3 Insert effect 1 5 settings MIXER Timbre volume pan and mute settings IFX4 ARP Arpeggiator easy editing IFX5 CINPUT AUDIO IN External audio input settings SETUP Master effect type selection and chain CTRL CONTROLLERS 5 and 2 function settings and C MEX settings tempo setting MFX1 Master effect 1 and 2 settings C TONE TONE ADJUST Tone Adjust settings for each timbre MFX2 ADJ EG ADJUST EG ADSR settings for each timbre MIDI MIDI channel settings for each timbre OSC OSC settings for each timbre C TIMBRE i PITCH Pitch settings for each timbre SCALE Scale selection KEY ZONE Key zone settings for each timbre C ZONE 7 z DELAY VEL ZONE Velocity zone settings for each timbre DELAY Delay time settings for each timbre The structure of a combination and the related pages
54. Select to specify the bus where the output of each timbre will be sent If you want the output of the timbre to be sent to insert effect 1 choose IFX1 The display shows the routing the insert effects and the chain settings In this example T01 timbre 1 is using IFX1 and 2 T02 is using IFX3 T03 is using IFX4 and T11 T12 T13 and T15 are using IFX5 3 Access the C FX ROUTING gt SEND page CESS E gt SEND lt E MIXERS TIMBRE 01 gt FX Control Bus Off Bus TIFR1 Sendi EEE Ca Send2 6068 1 Je 2a Se 4 a Se Ee Fe Se et Se 5 127 6 6 O 127 6 Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send levels from each timbre to the master effects This setting is valid only if Bus Bus Select is set to L R or Off Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying this setting with the Send1 or Send2 value of oscillators 1 and 2 in the program selected by the timbre If the program s S1 Send1 or S2 Send2 setting is 0 the actual level will be 0 even if you raise the send level setting here If Bus Bus Select is set to IFX1 IFXS5 the S1 Send1 and S2 Send2 C FX1 ROUTING gt MIXER settings following the insert effect will determine the send levels to the master effects 4 Access the C FX ROUTING gt MIXER page eREACETT PSUS SEND YCIEX gt TIER lag ee a eee Ota js GJ LAR S1 20052 8 946 B Off J C864 POIL R 1 10052 127 GOff J a ca64 h R L R St
55. Sl eS Track Select Recording Setup 3 Press the SEQUENCER REC button and then press the START STOP gt W button If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default settings the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the Modulation wheel to record your performance 4 When you finish playing press the START STOP gt BD button Recording will end and the location will return to the point where you started recording If you press the PAUSE ff button instead of the START STOP gt HM button recording will pause When you press the PAUSE II button once again recording will resume where you left off before pausing When you are finished press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording The following recording setup parameters are also available Recording Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer Overdub Select this method if you wish to record additional performance data by overdubbing it without erasing the previously recorded data Manual punch in Select this method when you wish to use the SEQUENCER REC button or a foot switch to re record selected portions of a previously recorded track Auto punch in Select this method when you wish to automatically re record selected portions of a previously recorded track Then recording will occur only over the specified area A
56. Song command in the dialog box that appears when a new song is selected before copying or bouncing see page 56 E Effect size mismatch Meaning When copying or swapping effects you attempted to place a double size effect at IFX5 insert effect 5 or MFX2 master effect 2 Don t specify a double size effect for IFX5 or MFX2 when executing the command Effect type mismatch Meaning This message will appear when copying or swapping effects if the copy destination or swap destination IFX insert effect or MFX master effect has an effect that cannot be selected For each IFX and MFX some effects can be selected and other effects cannot be selected Verify that the effect is one that can be selected for the copy destination or swap destination IFX or MFX Error in formatting media Meaning An error occurred while formatting the media Use other media Error in reading from media Meaning An error occurred while reading data from media This error may also appear when data is being written to media by a Save or Copy operation To solve this problem e Execute the reading procedure once again If the same error occurs it is possible that the data on the media has been damaged 115 116 Appendices Error in writing to media Meaning A verification error occurred while writing data to a media To solve this problem e Itis possible that the media has been physically damaged Try another med
57. This function makes layer or split settings that combine two program sounds Since Combination mode lets you use up to 16 programs to create complex layers and splits you can use Combination mode to make more detailed edits to the layer or split sound that you created here Quick Layer Strings Quick Split Bass A Split point LAYER button SPLIT button The Quick Layer Split function lets you adjust settings by pressing the front panel LAYER button or SPLIT button Note This function is available if Program mode is selected It is not available in Combination mode Note It is not available when selecting favorites Quick Layer A typical example of using layers is a sound that layers strings with piano or electric piano As an example here s how to create this sound 1 Press the PROG button to select Program mode 2 Select one of the two sounds piano that you want to layer Turn the CATEGORY dial to select PLANO and then turn the SELECT dial to select the piano program that you want to use Press the OK MENU button or the ENTER button see Selecting Programs on page 23 3 Press the LAYER button The button blinks The QUICK LAYER dialog box will appear Play the keyboard and you ll hear the layer sound QUICK LAYER Program STRINGS 666 TEER Eire Volume 127 Octave 6 r Use ARP CANCEL 4 Select the other program strings that will be layered with the pr
58. To GB UGO InitCombi CANCEL CANCEL FUNCTION button OK MENU button Text edit When you select a parameter indicated by this icon and press the ENTER button a text edit window will appear In this screen you can rename text such as the name of a program combination or song see Editing names on page 105 OK MENU button CANCEL FUNCTION button To execute a function press the OK button To cancel without executing press the CANCEL button Done button Copy button Insert button There are also buttons such as Done Copy and Insert which perform an action when pressed like the OK button and CANCEL button explained in Function dialog box Basic Information About the KROSS s modes Basic Information About the KROSS s modes The KROSS has numerous functions that let you play and edit programs or combinations record and play back sequence data and manage media These functions are grouped into modes The KROSS has four modes There is also an audio recorder function that lets you record an audio signal from an external mic or line input or the audio of the program combination or sequencer playback You can use the Favorites function to select and play a program combination or audio recorder song regardless of the mode you re in Program mode Programs are the basic sounds of KROSS In Program mode you can e Select and play Programs e Use one arpeggiator in y
59. Track10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 Changing the volume and pan settings of each track In the SEQ gt MIXER page you can change the volume and pan settings of each track SEQ TRACK 01 gt Sound 44 Play Pan CG4 Muting a specific track Monitoring a specific track Mute Solo functions The KROSS provides a Mute function that lets you silence specified tracks between 1 16 and a Solo function that lets you hear the specified track or channel by itself These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded tracks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo functions 1 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button Access the SEQ gt MIX page Press the PAGE or PAGE button to select the page 3 Use the A button to select Sound 4 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select the track that you want to mute Select track 1 Press the ENTER button to switch between Play and Mute The display will change from P Play to M Mute and the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a specified track until the track is un muted Press the gt button to select track 2 and press the ENTER button to switch it to Mute The
60. VEL and SWING to 00 Creating a user arpeggio pattern Editing a user arpeggio pattern GELIS Pain gt TONE YV MIXER ARP E PIAN0 000 R amp B E Piano SW1 2 mop GATE REVEL 00 p Swinc 00 2 1688 ArpeggioPatterni aaa Octave loct Resolution A v Sort r Latch v Key Sync v Keyboard Saving pattern Once you ve spent some time editing you ll want to save your work The contents of your editing in Global mode are preserved as long as the power is on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your edits you must execute the Write Arpeggio Patterns function This will save all Arpeggio Patterns If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the program see page 103 Tip To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the Rename Arpeggio Pattern function see page 178 of the Parameter Guide Melody pattern Gaeee 5 1 Access the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page 2 Specify tone 0 for Step 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 all other than 06 3 Specify the pitch Set the Step 02 Pitch to 10 Step 05 Pitch to 12 and the Step 08 Pitch to 2 CULES arse SETUP gt EDIT Moo o lWwal 4 Play a single key the arpeggio will begin playing Chordal pattern See Ilil 74 Arpeggiator
61. Voice Assign Mode be set to Mono gt p 31 Pitch is incorrect In the GLOBAL gt BASIC page are the Master Tune and Key Transpose settings correct p 97 In the P PITCH gt BASIC page is the Pitch Slope set to 1 02 PG p 15 In the combination or song are the Transpose and Detune settings of each timbre track set appropriately p 48 and PG p 117 In the timbre track settings of each program combination or song could you have selected a non standard scale type other than Equal Temperament p 48 and PG p 10 78 118 Audio input Can t input audio Is the input source connected to the MIC IN jack or the LINE IN jack p 18 Is the AUDIO IN button turned on p 19 Is the Line or Mic input selection correct 111 112 Appendices Line and Mic cannot both be input simultaneously In the AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box use the Select setting to choose either Line or Mic p 19 Mute and Bus set appropriately Inthe AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box select Line or Mic and check the parameter settings p 19 The principal parameters have the following default values Level 127 Play Mute Play Gain 00 Line 37 Gain Bus L R Too much noise or distortion in the audio input or in the recorded sound Is the Gain set correctly Inthe AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box if the LINE or MIC indication in the mid
62. and load data individually All programs 1 program 1 program i bank A D U Ao oa hem All combinations 1 combination 1combination bank A B U A Ot e All drum kits 1 drum kit 1 drum kit User bank INT USER A SEn AEn hen Undefined DOS file All user 1 user 1 user a arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern arpeggiopattern gt ae eia a on a bank INT USER io i Global settings i MDE E including favorites data i Po P a tan ceoeriecnrne cs a nine rejiciencble s cen a sess sh WAV file i SNG file 1 song All track 000 199 l 101 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data S avin g data Bank numbers and conditions for saving The bank and number indications show the numbers used for MIDI transmission and reception Since the conditions for saving will differ depending on the bank as shown in the Saving data on the KROSS following table this will provide a helpful guide With the factory settings the program banks have the following contents The KROSS can save PCG SNG or MID files as follows Note The explanation here applies to data in the DATA folder Programs Explanation and conditions for e Writing to internal memory Bank saving Prog No Use e Saving to an SD card commercially available A You can overwrite a bank e MIDI data dump number that contains a sound B Preload of th
63. and in the function list choose Write Global Setting Ifa different function is selected press the PAGE button to select it Press the OK MENU button A confirmation message will appear press the OK MENU button once again The setting has now been saved 18 Setup Connections 4 amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless usage may damage your speaker system or cause other malfunctions MIDI OUT IN USBB LINE IN MIC IN ASSIGNABLE AUDIO OUTPUT DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL R L MONO SD card slot SD card Insert an SD card USB cable gt toan AC outlet AC adapter Included MIDI cable MIDIIN MIDI OUT Audio player etc Mic 5 Connect input devices DS 1H PS 1 PS 3 EXP 2 XVP 10 C Monitor Amplifier etc MIDI keyboard Computer 1 Connect the stereo mini plug Audio con nections of your headphones to the KROSS s Headphone jack i es ccs 2 Use the VOLUME knob to Connecting your output devices adjust the headphone Headphones The KROSS does not contain built in speakers In order to volume hear the sound of your performance
64. any important data such as edited sounds or global settings see page 13 amp If the KROSS s auto power off function is enabled its power will automatically turn off if there has been no user input for a certain length of time Unsaved data will be lost even if the power is turned off by the auto power off function 1 Turn the KROSS s VOLUME knob all the way to the left so that the volume is lowered 2 If external equipment such as a monitor amplifier is connected lower their volume and then turn off their power before proceeding 3 Hold down the power button of the KROSS to turn off the power Keep holding down the button until the display turns off he Never turn off the power while processing is in progress Turning off the power while the following processes are in progress may damage the data in internal memory or on the SD card Writing data to internal memory display indicates Now writing into internal memory Writing to an SD card e g while saving in Media mode recording on the audio recorder or during Export amp A small amount of electrical power is used even when the power is off STANDBY If you won t be using the KROSS for an extended period turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet If you re using batteries remove the batteries Auto power off function The KROSS has an auto power off function that automatically turns off the power when there is no use
65. are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer When you write the Edit Buffer Edit program or combination When you select a program settings will be saved in or combination its data is internal memory Write Select called from internal memory into the edit buffer Internal Memory Combination A 0 127 awa Ny Writing Global settings User Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode memory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory you must Write it When you write this data the data in the memory area is written into internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area n x lt Edit When you Write the adie bata When the power is various Global mode turned on the settings settings willbe savedin Write Power On_ are called into the internal memory memory area Internal Memory Global Setting B ARP PATTERN DRUM KIT G USER SCALE Writing saving procedure The following three types of Global
66. button to access the function list The functions that are assigned to the four buttons are shown in the bottom of the dialog box If you press the CLOSE actually FUNCTION button the dialog box will close and you ll return to the previous page Press the A actually PAGE button or W actually PAGE button to select a function Press the OK actually MENU button to open or execute the selected function For example if you select Write Program and press the OK MENU button the WRITE PROGRAM dialog box will appear Here the CANCEL FUNCTION and OK MENU functions are assigned to the two buttons 12 Value controller Use these to edit in the display You ll use these to move the cursor and select parameters to edit values and also to execute or cancel commands Introduction to the KROSS ENTER button Use this button to perform a function select an option button or to turn a check box on off When you select a parameter and press the ENTER button you ll be able to use the A V cursor buttons to edit the value After you ve edited the value press the ENTER button to confirm the change When you press the ENTER button on the MAIN page of Program or Combination mode a sound select list will appear EXIT button Use this button to cancel the execution of a function or the change in a parameter value or to close a dialog box You ll also use this to move to the first page such as the MAIN page
67. by Track Select EXT EX2 BTH During playback the MIDI data recorded on that track will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT to play an external sound module When you use the KROSS s keyboard or controllers MIDI data will be transmitted to play and control the external sound module selected by Track Select The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel S TRACK gt MIDI page of KROSS tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the external tone generator and internal tone generator will be played and controlled Set the pan and volume of each track Press the PAGE button to access the SEQ gt MIX page Use the cursor button V to choose Pan or Volume Use the cursor buttons lt P to select the track whose settings you want to edit Pan sets the pan position of each track and Volume sets the volume level of each track SEQ ae o1 b Sound 4 Q Play Pan C664 Volume I CY De ee a ee a ee 2 SI Re ES A A Ce 27127127127 12727127127 12P 12727127127 127 127127 _ Specify the MIDI channel that each MIDI track will play Access the S TRACK gt MIDI page Press the MENU button to select S TRACK Move to the appropriate page ASC io 0s Piro SGaLe TRACK 01 gt MIDl Channel Bank Select MSB 646 when EX2 Bank Select LSB 000 01 683 a ed 1 2 1S 1 15 ml E a 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 Use MIDI Channel to
68. by itself e Adjust the GLOBAL gt BASIC page Key Transpose setting The transposition range is up or down one octave in semitone steps When playing via MIDI In addition to the Key Transpose setting described above you can also change the Convert Position setting By switching the Convert Position you can specify whether the Key Transpose setting and the velocity curve setting described below will be applied to MIDI IN or to MIDI OUT If you re using an external MIDI keyboard to play the sound generator of the KROSS and want to transpose the pitch set this to Post MIDI The velocity curve will also apply to MIDI IN If you re using the keyboard of the KROSS to play an external MIDI sound module and want to transpose the pitch set this to Pre MIDI The velocity curve will also apply to MIDI OUT Changing how velocity will affect the volume and tone Velocity curves let you adjust the way the KROSS responds to your playing dynamics on the keyboard The default setting should work for most players but there are many other choices to let you customize the response to match your own style 97 98 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data The GLOBAL gt BASIC page Velocity Curve setting specifies how velocity will affect the volume and tone Velocity Curve 4 is the default and should work for most players Curve 9 is designed specifically for playing piano sounds from the weighted NH keyboards
69. dial This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing 4 To return to the MAIN page press the MENU button Programs including tours of the front panel controllers and or the ENTER button to close the menu basic editing techniques When you press the FUNCTION button or the EXIT button your selection will be discarded and you ll return to the program where you were before opening the list Playing Prog rams Other ways to select programs In addition to using the controls on the KROSS s front panel you can select programs in the following ways i s i ted foot switch 2 Selecting Programs Using a connected foot switch see page 20 e Receiving a MIDI program change from an external 1 Press the PROG button LED lit MIDI sequencer or MIDI controller Yov ll enter Program mode e Selecting a program that you ve registered in Favorites Access the PROG gt MAIN page The upper line of the see page 49 display shows the page that you re on Ifa different page is shown press the EXIT button several times to access the PROG MAIN page Program categories and numbers Category type Program number bank number Mode page name Tabs Tempo Power supply The sounds of the KROSS are organized by type into anges ENEN categories within each category an index number is E PIANO 00 A000 J 120 00 ge assigned to each sound All programs are also assigned a bank and program number that are used to recall tha
70. dial and the value dial to select a sound 49 50 Favorites function As when selecting a program or combination you can also press the ENTER button and choose from the list that appears To switch between programs and combinations use the PROG PAGE and COMBI PAGE buttons 4 When you ve found the sound that you want to register press the ENTER button The registration will be changed to the new sound Changing the order of favorites If you want to change the order of the favorites you ve registered you can do so by using the Copy Favorite Insert Favorite and Delete Favorite functions For details on how to use these functions please see page 13 1 Use the Copy Favorite function to copy the selected favorite to the clipboard 2 Select the favorite where you want to insert the copied favorite Use the Insert Favorite function to insert the favorite from the clipboard Note All favorites existing after the position where you inserted will be moved back one space within that bank The favorite at the last position in the bank 16 will disappear 3 To delete the selected favorite use the Delete Favorite function Note All favorites existing after the one you deleted will be moved forward one space within that bank The last position in the bank 16 will become an initialized favorite Note If you execute this function with the All Favorites check box selected all favorites will be deleted Conven
71. fia Fe ek ak 25 es ek nF iE 1 b3 3 9 S5 5 7 s 3 J0 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button to play back the demo song Measures 10 through 13 will play repeatedly Individually looping a track During song playback or recording you can make a currently playing track loop individually As an example try the following settings Note Turn LOOP Loop All Tracks off For more about Solo settings see page 53 Song Select 003 LOOP Off Sa ae SP in j r Aut ose oo 00 1 0 1 000 tate a0aga e C 883 PLAY and GO H r Mutti REC rfp EA Lek Ee Lot et Leet eet Jag am ler E n 7 a ae geL OEN m2m mem Solo On Solo On 1 In Sequencer mode access the S LOOP TONE gt LOOP page Press the MENU button select S LOOP TONE from the menu and press the OK MENU button 2 Select track 1 as the track where you re adjusting settings Press the cursor button lt to make the track number towards the upper left side of the display indicate TRACK 01 Track Select 01 Track Play Loop On Play Intro On se AR TRANK Olbp fe eae v Play Intro Loop Start MOOS MOOS T End Maag 3 amao sl2 13 10 15 15 O 2 ee ee e Yr Par oe a l L FEFEFE F Loop Start M005 Loop End M008 Playing back Playback methods 3 Turn on Track Play Loop Use the cursor button A to select the pa
72. for each Timbre either in milliseconds ms or in rhythmic values which sync to the system tempo If you set the Delay to Key Off the Timbre will sound when the note is released r MIDI Tempo Sync Lease Note B Times xi Je 2a Fa ee a Pe a ed 2 dS I i 6 6 6 6 TIMBRE O1 gt Delay Time ms BELEN gt gt 666 6 6 6 6 Arpeggiator settings According to the note data received from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator will automatically generate a wide range of phrases or patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns A combination lets you use two arpeggiators For more about the arpeggiator please see page 67 Drum Track settings While you perform using a combination you can use the KROSS s rich variety of drum patterns to play high quality drum programs Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful way to come up with new phrases You can select the drum program that you want and specify how it will start For more about the Drum Track function please see page 77 Using the step sequencer In a combination the step sequencer uses the drum program of timbre 16 You can use buttons 1 16 to intuitively create drum loop patterns and play them For more about the step sequencer please see page 81 Effects For details please see Using Effects on page 61 Automatically imp
73. function 1 Access the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page 2 In Step 01 set tone 01 3 In Step 03 04 06 and 08 set tones 00 04 4 Select Step 01 and set Gate to LGT Legato 5 Select Step 06 and set Gate to LGT Legato Tip To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar chord select Flam In Program mode select an acoustic guitar program and choose the user arpeggio pattern that you created here In the PARP gt SETUP page set Gate to Step Then return to the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page For odd numbered steps set Flam to a positive value For even numbered steps set Flam to a negative value CULE GO SETUP gt EDIT Moo 4a 3 a 1 o ST A1 Pi n Drum pattern You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using Fixed Note with a drum program 1 In Program mode select a drum kit program For this example select the preset program DRUMS SFX 000 Basic Kit 1 2 In ARP PATTERN select the MODE page and parameter settings Arpeggio Tone Mode Set this to Fixed Note This will cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch Mode Fixed Note Mode If you set this to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all tones If you set this to Trigger As Played the tones will be sounded according to the notes that you play on the keyboard see page 168 of the Parameter Guide CGE iais SETUP gt
74. functions of the LOCATE Iq PAUSE I REW 44 and FF gt gt buttons please see page 5 You can use the FF REW Speed function to specify the fast forward and rewind speed Note Track Select chooses the track that will be played by the keyboard Specifying the location By pressing the LOCATE fk button you can move to a specified location By default you ll move to 001 01 000 You can use the song command Set Location to change this location see page 142 of the Parameter Guide Alternatively you can specify the location during playback by holding down the EXIT button and pressing the LOCATE button Loop playback Looping all tracks simultaneously By selecting the LOOP check box you can make the song play or record in a loop In this example we ll loop measures 10 through 13 of the demo song 1 In Sequencer mode access the SEQ gt MAIN page 2 Add a check mark to LOOP Loop All Tracks Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the parameter and press the ENTER button 3 Set the measure from which you want to start looping the Loop Start Measure to 10 and the measure at which you want to stop looping the Loop End Measure to 13 Use the cursor button to select each parameter and use the value dial to specify the value Song Select 000 LOOP On Loop Start M010 End M013 a ee mm SN Arr Auto _ J 125 0 tales E L LELE v Loor Moio RAE Q 898 Heart Rate F Me r
75. if Trigger Mode is Wait KBD Trigger The Drum Tracks will not be triggered immediately but will be triggered in synchronization with the sequencer the moment recording starts Slave operation Connect the KROSS s MIDI IN to your external MIDI device s MIDI OUT or connect the KROSS s USB B connector to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock see page 99 to External MIDI or External USB Note If the KROSS is set to MIDI Clock Auto it will also synchronize to the external MIDI device in the same way if MIDI timing clock messages are being received from the external device Synchronization to MIDI clock The arpeggiator function will synchronize to a tempo based on the external MIDI clock timing Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands In Sequencer mode Song Start Continue and Stop messages that the KROSS receives will control song playback and recording just as when you use the front panel START STOP gt Hf button The KARMA function also will be controlled in the same way as when you use the front panel START STOP gt I button see Synchronization with song stop Master operation If you want an external MIDI device or computer to synchronize to the KROSS s MIDI timing clock and realtime commands connect the KROSS s MIDI OUT to your external MIDI device s MIDI IN or connect the KROSS s USB port to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock to Internal Note The same a
76. in the 88 note models see Velocity Curve on page 156 of the Parameter Guide e Specify the position where the velocity curve will be applied For more about Convert Position please see Transposing the keyboard above Velocity curves Convert Position PostMIDI Velocity MIDI In to sound engines MAX Convert Position PreMIDI Velocity Keyboard to MIDI Out Soft Strong r Effect bypass settings Memory protect settings GLOBAL P BASIC gt SYSTEM lt _PREF LI Effect su y memory f Program vMex PROTECT Combination ARP SS DT I ALL Off r Song LOAD ARP f Program r Drum Kit cea l Combination r ARP Pattern Stop the arpeggiator Step sequencer and drum track Bypassing the effects You can bypass the KROSS s insert effects and master effects These settings will bypass the effects in all modes If you re using effects such as reverb or chorus provided by an external effect processor mixer or DAW you can bypass the KROSS s own effects so that they will not be used The GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page Effect SW setting bypasses the effects If the check box is cleared the effects will be bypassed Clearing the IFX box Bypasses the insert effects Clearing the MFX box Bypasses the master effects MFX can also be controlled by the front panel MASTER FX button This is a convenient way to temporarily turn off effects such as reverb while you perform Note These parameters wil
77. indication shows the number used for MIDI transmission and reception Since the conditions for saving will differ depending on the bank this provides a helpful guide For more about banks please see Bank numbers and conditions for saving on page 102 For the programs in banks GM g d a GM icon is shown at the left of the PANO DRUM IFX icon mentioned earlier For details on programs please see the separate Voice Name List SW Switch assignment information In the PROG gt MAIN page you can see the following information above the selected program SW1 SW2 Indicate the functions that are assigned to the SW1 and SW2 buttons Using Controllers In addition to using the keyboard the KROSS lets you control the sound by using the pitch bend wheel modulation wheel SW1 and SW2 buttons damper pedal and foot switch or foot pedal These controls let you modify the tone pitch volume effects etc in realtime as you play Pitch bend wheel modulation wheel SW1 SW2 buttons gt p l Damper pedal foot switch pedal p 20 e TEMPO knob TAP button p 5 Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer Based on the note data that it receives from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator can generate a wide range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns For more about the arpeggiator please
78. lt gt A Y or the value dial to select a character and press the ENTER button to input that character 4 Press the SHIFT FUNCTION button to switch characters 5 If you hold down the SHIFT FUNCTION button the three functions at the bottom of the display will become INSERT DELETE and SPACE insert a space If you hold down the SHIFT FUNCTION button and press the ENTER button a character will be inserted at the left of the cursor Similarly you can hold down the SHIFT FUNCTION button and press DELETE PAGE to delete the character at the cursor location or press SPACE PAGE to insert a space at the cursor location 6 Press the OK MENU button to confirm If you decide to discard the changes press the EXIT button 105 106 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data Saving to SD card For details on the data that can be saved on SD card please see Data used by the KROSS on page 100 lA The musical data of a song that you create in Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the KROSS s internal memory You must save this data on a commercially available SD card or save it using MIDI data dump When you ve come up with settings you like it s a good idea to save them so that even if you subsequently edit those settings you ll always be able to reload the previous settings if desired For details on the SD cards that can be used and on how to insert or remove the SD card in the ca
79. may not necessary match the values that appear on the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers What is REMs 7VEMLS ms Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Modeling System is Korg s proprietary technology for digitally recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a sound ranging from the sound production mechanisms of acoustic instruments and electric electronic musical instruments to the resonances of an instrument body or speaker cabinet the sound field in which the instrument is played the propagation route of the sound the electrical and acoustic response of mics and speakers and the changes produced by vacuum tubes and transistors All product names and company names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Table of Contents About this manual ccccceccccccscceccecs ii Introduction to the KROSS 1 Front and rear panels sccececceccececceces 1 Front panel sos vs suede entsn tal Eea AR ER ue mbes aes 1 Redi panel orien dusty nad Pode ieee tie waletaiee vielen dein deay Be 6 Items in the display ccccccce cesses cece eeeeeeeeees 7 Basic Information cceeceecceccesceeeee 9 About the KROSS s modes n 9 Basic operations inean c
80. of each sample Attack 66 Decay 05 BottomVel 880 Xfade EAJ Linear 1 If you like adjust the Levels for the two Drumsamples This can be very useful in creating a smooth velocity split or crossfade 2 As necessary specify the tuning EG parameters and filter For each drumsample adjust the Tune Attack Amp EG Attack Decay Amp EG Decay Cutoff and Resonance Using Exclusive Groups 1 Access the DRUM KIT gt VOICE page 2 Use Excl Exclusive Group to assign the drumsamples to groups For example let s say that you ve assigned an open hi hat and a closed hi hat to the same exclusive group e Play the open hi hat sound e While it s still ringing play the closed hi hat The open hi hat sound will be cut off simulating the action of a physical hi hat FORUM KIT deeb at sae bata ae GI BBCINT Basic Kit 1 F 3_ v Assign noms r Single Trigger MIXER Pan ROS4 Excl Group EEA Bus Select D IFX3 Inst Type B H H FX Control Bus B Off _ v Note On r Note Off Sendi 600 Send2 6660 Sustaining the sound even after the key is released Hold Use the Hold function for instruments that should continue sustaining even after the key is released such as a crash cymbal The way this works will depend on the settings of the program and drum kit Set the Hold function as follows 1 Access the P BASIC gt NOTE ON page 2 Make sure that the Key Zone setting Hold is on
81. on the LAYER or SPLIT button Is Program mode selected These functions can t be used outside of Program mode Troubleshooting Audio output Can t turn on the FAVORITES button Could the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP button be on No response when you press the STEP SEQ button Is FAVORITES turned on The STEP SEQ button is temporarily used to operate the step sequencer when FAVORITES is on In Combination or Sequencer mode you can t edit the value of Timbre Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status Some parameters can t be edited while notes are playing either locally or from MIDI If the damper pedal is held down or if its calibration is incorrect notes may be sustaining even if they aren t audible e Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does not match the Damper Polarity setting G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page p 20 e In some cases this problem can be solved be executing the Half Damper Calibration function GLOBAL gt BASIC page PG p 176 Audio output No sound o Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones p 18 Is the connected amp or mixer powered on and is its volume raised Is Local Control turned on In G MIDI gt BASIC check the Local Control On check box gt p 99 Could the VOLUME knob be turned all the way to the left p 1 Is the Master Volume assigned to Foo
82. once again The setting has now been saved WRITE GLOBAL SETTING Are you sure CANCEL Auto power off warning message When the specified length of time has elapsed without any user input on the KROSS a message will appear warning you that the auto power off function is about to turn off the power The system has been idle for more than 4 hours and will shut down in 00 01 You can change the Auto Power Off setting on the following page GLOBAL PREF If you want to continue using the system press the keyboard or a button The Auto power off function will be reset If the same specified length of time elapses with no user input the same message will appear again IN MIDI OUT PROG RSs ELT AUDIO RECORDER SETUP m Bank Map 4 KORG Auto Power Off QOEM LJ I ee a Battery Type Alkali GLOBALI LCD Contrast 00 MEDIA LAYER spuiT Auto Rec Start Q Off a EXIT A ENTER 1 AUDIO IN FUNCTION PAGE PAGE CJI amp S Turning the power on off Using batteries Using batteries Batteries that can be used Use six AA nickel metal hydride batteries or alkaline batteries Zinc carbon batteries cannot be used Note Batteries are not included You need to obtain them separately amp Do not mix new and old batteries or batteries of differing types Mixin
83. one of the 128 notes By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of 99 cents you can raise or lower it by approximately one semitone relative to the normal pitch OCTAVE User Octave Scale C KEY 29 99 T Le Le eel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the scale for a program for each timbre of a combination or for each track of a song You can choose these scales from the following pages Mode Page P BASIC gt SCALE Scale Type C TIMBRE gt SCALE Scale Type Use Program s Scale S TRACK gt SCALE Scale Type Use Program s Scale Program Combination Sequencer Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in Sequencer mode 1 Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale Select a key and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the pitch The range of 99 raises or lowers the pitch approximately one semitone above or below the standard pitch Note You can also select the key by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard Note You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it to create an original scale To do so use the Copy Scale function 2 Access the Sequencer mode S TRACK gt SCALE page 3 Set Scale Type Song s Scale to select the scale for the currently selected song 4 If you want the Track to use the scale saved with its individual Program check the track
84. output The output signals from the Master Effects are routed to the L R bus with the output level specified by Return1 and Return2 These outputs are mixed with the L R output bus in each mode FX ROUTING gt BUS page or MIXER page Selecting 000 No Effect will mute the output The processed signal will be output in one of the following ways according to the type of effects Mono In Mono Out Wet Mono In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out _steweoin steeoout ae Master effect 1 can use the effects S01 Stereo Compressor S87 Phaser Cho Flng and D00 St Mltband Limiter D13 Early Reflections Master effect 2 can use the effects S01 Stereo Compressor 120 Reverb Gate Note The Parameter Guide includes block diagrams for each individual effect which include the effect s input output structure see page 207 of the Parameter Guide Effects in each mode Program mode For programs you can use insert effects to process the final sound in the same way that you use the Filter and Amplifier to process the sound from the oscillators OSC 1 amp 2 Then use the master effects to add spatial processing such as reverb to create the final sound You can also use the same effects on the audio output of the Drum Track and the step sequencer program These settings are made individually for each program Return scillatord HC Filter1
85. overall volume The function of the assignable pedal is specified by Global Media mode settings in the G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page see Connecting a foot pedal on page 21 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack An on off type foot switch such as the optional PS 1 or PS 2 pedal switch can be connected to this jack You can use a foot switch to apply modulation to sounds or effects to set the tap tempo or to start stop the sequencer or to punch in out The function of the assignable switch is specified by Global Media mode settings in the G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page just as for the assignable pedal see Connecting a foot switch on page 20 DAMPER jack An optional DS 1H damper pedal can be connected to this jack If the optional DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal If another switch type pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch The DS 1H half damper pedal allows a finer degree of control compared to a switch type pedal Set the pedal polarity so that the pedal will function correctly see Connecting a damper pedal on page 20 Items in the display a Current page f Option buttons b Tabs SEG a 6010 in coONTROLLE r G SET Select OLine Mic Pan R127 L i ac R evel 127 Play Gain 4 Bus B Send1 aaa anon FX Control BS B Eff c Parameters g Toggle e Popup button d Edit cell h Check box a Current page This indicates the current page with
86. page 103 Note When editing a user arpeggio pattern pay attention to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit Regarding arpeggiator synchronization Key Sync parameter Regarding arpeggiator synchronization Key Sync parameter The timing of the arpeggiator notes depends on the state of the arpeggiator Key Syne check box If this box is checked the arpeggiator will start running at the first note on that occurs after you ve taken your hands completely off the keyboard If this box is unchecked the arpeggiator will run in synchronization with the internal external MIDI clock Below we will explain how synchronization occurs when the Key Sync check box is not checked Synchronization with Song Start and with MIDI realtime Start messages are excluded Synchronization between arpeggiators AandB In Combination and Sequencer modes the two arpeggiators can run simultaneously In this case if one arpeggiator is already running and you then run the other arpeggiator with Key Sync unchecked the second arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the first arpeggiator If Key Sync is checked arpeggiators A and B will run independently each at their own tempo Synchronization with the drum track If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize to the dr
87. recorder is working e Press the card inward you will hear a click and the card will partially pop out allowing you to pull it completely out Please see the owner s manual included with your card and observe the guidelines for handling and use About the write protect setting of an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overwritten accidentally and lost If a card is protected you can t save or delete data on it use it to record with the audio recorder or format the card If you need to perform these procedures you must first set the switch to its original position Connecting the KROSS to a computer USB connection The KROSS provides both MIDI and USB connectors as standard equipment By connecting the KROSS to your computer via USB you can use it as a controller and MIDI sound module for your DAW software with single cable convenience and with out the need for a MIDI interface By using the dedicated editor you can edit some of the parameters of the KROSS from your computer as though it were a software plug in Note The USB connector of the KROSS is only able to transmit and receive MIDI data amp Before you connect the KROSS to your computer via USB you must install the KORG USB MIDI driver on your computer About the software The latest version of the KORG USB MIDI driver and the KROSS Editor Plug in Editor can be downloaded from the Korg website http
88. s played or by performance expressions Such aspects can be controlled by modulators and controllers such as the EG envelope generator LFO low frequency oscillator and the modulation wheel These modulators and controllers can apply changes to the basic program Take a look at the illustration below called Program structure Notice that the signal flow is in the order of Oscillator Pitch Filter Amp You can see how the EGs and LFOs affect each section As shown in the illustration each program consists of sections such as OSC 1 2 effects and the arpeggiator Program structure OSC oscillator 1 2 The OSC oscillator generates the waveform that is the basis of the sound On the KROSS the oscillator consists of multiple sampled sounds such as a multisample or a drum kit drumsamples The KROSS provides two oscillators OSC1 and OSC2 You can create more complex programs by combining these The OSC which is the basis of the sound can be controlled by modulating its pitch filter amp EG and LFO to change the sound in a wide range of ways Note Pitch EG is shared by OSC1 and OSC2 Effects As effects you can use five insert effects and two master effects The output of OSC 1 2 is sent to these effect processors By choosing the desired effect for each processor and editing its parameters you can apply a wide range of effects such as modulation distortion and reverberation Arpeggiator A prog
89. see page 55 MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Sequencer mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive The drum track will receive on the MIDI channel specified by the Input S DRUM TRACK gt CHANNEL setting of each song Normally you ll set this to Tch and use the KROSS s keyboard to control the triggering Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by the Output S DRUM TRACK gt CHANNEL setting of each song Set this to match the MIDI channel of the MIDI track where you ve assigned the drum program If the track s Status SEQ gt PROG is BTH EXT or EX2 note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted 79 80 Drum Track function Synchronizing the Drum Track function The Trigger Sync parameter The trigger timing of a drum track will depend on the setting of its Trigger Syne parameter On checked The trigger timing will be quantized to the nearest beat relative to the base tempo Off unchecked If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately triggering will occur at the moment you press the DRUM TRACK button If this is set to Wait KBD Trigger triggering will occur at the moment you play the keyboard Synchronization with the arpeggiator step sequencer and Sequencer mode songs Turn the Sync setting On if you want the Drum Track patterns to play or record in synchronization with
90. settings easily Specifications Error and confirmation messages Specifications 61 keys velocity sensitive aftertouch not supported Normally C2 C7 adjustable in the range C1 C6 C3 C8 Keyboard NH Natural weighted hammer action keyboard no aftertouch KROSS 88 Normally AO C8 adjustable in the range A 1 C7 A1 C9 The NH keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano with low notes being heavier and high notes being lighter EDS i Enhanced Definition Synthesis integrated 80 voices 80 oscillators single mode 40 voices 40 oscillators single mode The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading Preset PCM memor Approximately 112 MB calculated as 48 kHz 16 bit linear PCM data equivalent y 421 multisamples including six stereo 890 drumsamples including 49 stereo OSC1 Single OSC1 2 Double Stereo multisamples are supported Oscillator g A Bras 4 velocity zones per oscillator with switching crossfades and layers Filters Four types of filter routing single serial parallel 24 dB Programs Two multi mode filters per voice low pass high pass band pass band reject For each voice two envelope generators Filter amp Amp two LFOs two key tracking Modulation generators Filter amp Amp and two AMS mixers In addition pitch EG common LFO and two common key tracking generators i
91. specify the MIDI channel for each track Normally you will set the MIDI Channel to a different channel 1 16 for each track Tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when you record or play back either of the tracks Adjust the effect settings Use the S FX ROUTING S IFX and S MFX pages to make effect settings in each page see Effect settings for a combination or song on page 64 Recording Preparations for recording 6 Set the tempo and time signature To set the tempo you can turn the TEMPO knob or press the TAP button at the desired interval Alternatively you can select J Tempo in the SEQ gt MAIN page or similar page and use the VALUE controllers to set the tempo Set Tempo Mode to Manual e Next you will set the time signature In this example we ll explain how to set the time signature using the Time Sig Time Signature field Normally you specify the time signature before recording the first track and then begin recording a Access the SEQ gt REC page b Press the SEQUENCER REC button and set Time Sig Time Signature to c Press to highlight it and use the VALUE controllers to set the time signature Press the START STOP gt gt I button to begin recording When the pre count has ended and Locate reaches 001 01 000 press the START STOP gt HB button to stop recording The time signature you specified has now be
92. synchronize the Drum Track pattern playback to the step sequencer that s currently running select the Sync check box in each mode DRUM TRACK gt PATTERN page Drum Track setting Synchronization between the step sequencer and the sequencer in Sequencer mode When playing or recording a song The step sequencer will synchronize to the song in units of one beat Synchronization with song start e Ifthe step sequencer is on i e the RUN button is on and running it will reset to the beginning of the pattern when it receives a song start message Synchronization with the playback of an external sequencer If J Tempo is EXT i e if the G MIDI gt BASIC page MIDI Clock parameter is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB in Program Combination or Sequencer modes the step sequencer will synchronize to MIDI timing clock and start messages from an external MIDI sequencer etc connected via a MIDI cable Note The step sequencer will also synchronize in the same way if MIDI Clock is set to Auto and MIDI timing clock messages are being received from a connected MIDI device Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock The step sequencer will synchronize to J Tempo based on the external MIDI timing clock Synchronization with the MIDI realtime command Start message If the step sequencer is on and running it will be reset to the beginning of the pattern when it receives the Start command Audio recorder
93. the P FX ROUTING gt IFX page For details on the parameters of each effect please see page 207 and following of the Parameter Guide Double size effects Double size effects D00 St Mltband Limiter D13 Early Reflections use twice as much processing area as other effects DOO St Mltband Limiter D10 Rotary SpeakerOD can be used with insert effect 1 D00 St Mltband Limiter D09 Vocoder can be used with insert effects 2 4 and D00 St Mltband Limiter D13 Early Reflections can be used with master effect 1 When you use a double size effect the next numbered effect will be unavailable For example if you ve selected a double size effect for IFX1 you won t be able to use IFX2 Example of when a double size effect is selected for IFX1 Geb ete e eee EUS gt SEND IFX XMIXERS 1a OC BEERS eo v e 2 GB 83 Stereo Limiter FQ 24 3 4 G G00 No Effect r gt 5 5 6 981 Stereo Compressor I Master effects 1 Send1 and Send2 settings P FX ROUTING gt SEND page or P FX ROUTUNG gt MIXER page determine the input level to the master effects If Send1 and Send2 are set to 0 nothing will be input to the master effects Send1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send2 corresponds to MFX2 2 Access the P MFX gt SETUP page E EET OE A FE UU 1 2 0 BESS Return 127 r Chain wd Chain Level 127 2 00 185 Reverb Hall Return 127
94. the PROG gt TONE page Press the PROG button to access the Program mode PROG MAIN page If it does not appear press the EXIT button several times 2 Use the cursor buttons lt P gt A Y to select the parameter that you want to edit 3 Use the VALUE dial etc to edit the value PROG Pain gt TONE MIXERS ARP PIANO AAA E Krosa Grand Piano TONE Cutoff EGeAttack ADJUST Decay Sustain Resonance 66 EG Intensity 08 VYel Intensity 68 Release Tone Adjust Filter Tone Adjust Amp Brightness of the Volume change EG Adjust Time varying change in volume and brightness sound produced by your keyboard dynamics Tone Adjust controls Note When the Tone Adjust controls are at 00 the program parameters will have their original values Cutoff This adjusts the filter s cutoff frequency Adjusting the cutoff frequency will modify the brightness of the sound Resonance This adjusts the filter s resonance level Adjusting the filter resonance level will boost the sound in the region of the frequency giving a distinctive character to the sound In the case of a Low Pass Filter Level l 1 Resonance Cutoff Frequency Low High EG Intensity This adjusts the filter EG intensity the depth of how the EG affects the filter Normally increasingly negative values settings will make the filter EG have a shallower effect and increasingly positive values
95. to set the date and time before saving the file 1 Select the MEDIA gt UTILITY page Set Date Time function see steps 2 and 3 of Formatting SD card A dialog box will appear SET DATE TIME Year HJE Month 64 Day 03 Hour 88 Minute 00 Second 68 CANCEL 2 Use the VALUE dial to set the correct year month day hour minute and second 3 Press the OK MENU button Appendices Restoring the factory settings Loading the preloaded data The original preload data is backed up in the KROSS so you can restore any or all of the Programs Combinations Drum Kits User Arpeggio Patterns and Global settings to their original factory settings Note The original demo songs can be re loaded at any time For details please see About the data loaded by All Preload PCG User banks and user patterns where preload data has not been loaded will remain unchanged If you want to erase user banks or user patterns initialize the KROSS and then load the preload data For more details please see Initializing the system on page 110 he Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded Before you load the preload data go to the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page and uncheck the Memory Protect settings for the data that you want to load If you execute this procedure with these settings checked the data will not be loaded Loading the preloaded data will overwrite the contents of the interna
96. use the Copy From Program Copy Insert Effect or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these settings from Program mode PG p 139 151 151 Are the audio input parameters such as Level Gain Play Sequencer A program selected fora track sounds different than when played in Program mode When you select a program for a track in Sequencer mode the arpeggiator and effect settings from Program mode are not automatically applied e You can use the Copy From Program Copy Insert Effect or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these settings from Program mode PG p 139 151 151 Song does not play correctly after being loaded Are the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created e When saving the song it is best to use Save All PCG amp SNG so that the programs are saved together with the song Then when loading load both the PCG and the SEQ data p 108 Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt mg button in Sequencer mode Is the MIDI Clock G MIDI gt BASIC set to Internal or Auto p 99 Can t record in Sequencer mode Did you use Track Select to select the MIDI track that you want to record p 56 Is the Memory Protect Song check box GLOBAL gt SYSTEM unchecked p 98 Is the MIDI Clock G MIDI gt BASIC set to Internal or Auto gt p 99 A combination copied using Copy From Combina
97. used to modify the parameters of the insert effect IFX1 applied to the program of track 1 Note In order to record system exclusive messages make sure that the G MIDI gt FILTER setting Enable Exclusive is checked Go to Global mode and verify that this is checked 1 Select the desired program for MIDI track 1 and route it to IFX1 Then record a phrase of about sixteen measures Inthe SEQ gt PROG page use Program Select to select the desired program for MIDI Track 01 Inthe S FX ROUTING gt BUS page route the Track 01 Bus to IFX1 Then in the S FX ROUTING gt IFX page select the desired effect for IFX1 e Select Track 01 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt HM button and record a phrase of about sixteen measures 2 Select Track 09 in Track Select and record parameter changes as desired Note For this example select an empty track If you want to record onto a MIDI track that already contains data set the SEC gt REC page Recording Setup to Overdub e Select Track 09 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt W button and begin recording e At the appropriate time while recording adjust the parameter s that you want to realtime record In the S FX ROUTING gt IFX page select another effect for IFX1 and modify the effect parameter values Note In addition to effect parameter chan
98. with a different program number the sound of the combination will also change reflecting the altered program 1 Verify that the program or combination you want to save is selected 2 Select the Write Program or Write Combination function If you selected a bank U program or combination the function will be Write Initialize Program or Write Initialize Combination Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE button to select the above function and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear Note The conditions for saving will depend on the bank see Bank numbers and conditions for saving on page 102 3 The conditions for saving will differ depending on the bank of the program or combination you selected in step 1 If you selected program bank A D or combination bank A or B If you specified Write you can save the sound to the same category within bank A D The category is fixed PIANO 668 Kross Grand Piano ago write O New 3 fist ly WRITE To gt G40 Kross Grand Piano CANCEL If you specified New you can specify any category and save the sound in bank U 000 127 PIANO 668 Kross Grand Piano rlOwite EERIE Piano ly WRITE To DB UGG InitPro CANCEL If you selected program bank U or combination bank U If you specified New you can specify any category and save the sound in bank U 000 127 USER 000 QliinitProg id rl OLEA USER O hnitialize 4 WRITE To
99. you ll need to connect The KROSS s Headphone jack other audio equipment such as a monitor amplifier a mixer will output the same signal as a stereo set or headphones the OUTPUT L MONO and R i i jacks Connecting audio equipment The output from the OUTPUT jack is not turned off even amp The KROSS s audio output is designed to produce a if headphones are connected to the Headphone jack signal level that is higher than consumer audio equipment such as CD players For this reason performing at high a volume may damage your speakers Connecting your input devices or equipment Please use caution when adjusting the You can sing while applying the built in effects of the volume KROSS to your mic or connect an audio player and perform 1 Minimize the volume of all connected equipment and along with the playback turn off the power You can also use the audio recorder to record the audio 2 Connect the KROSS s OUTPUT L MONO and R input jacks to the input jacks of your monitor amplifier or he If you re not using the MIC IN or LINE IN jacks turn mixer the AUDIO IN button off unlit Note If you connect only the L MONO jack the L and R c 7 sound will be mixed for monaural output In order to take onnecting a mic full advantage of the KROSS s capabilities we 1 Make sure that the AUDIO IN button is off unlit recommend that you listen in stereo 2 Turn the VOLUME knob of the KROSS all the way to If you re playing back throug
100. 005 Note As with the other user songs the Demo Song data will not remain in Sequencer mode when you turn off the power You ll need to load it again if necessary Initializing the user bank Here s how to initialize a program or combination in the user bank bank U 1 Select the user bank bank U program or combination that you want to initialize Use the CATEGORY dial to select the USER category and use the SELECT dial to select the program or combination then press the MENU button 2 Select the Write Initialize Program or Write Initialize Combination function Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE button to select the function above and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear USER 00 4 F ONewih i INITIALIZE CANCEL 3 Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select Initialize and press the ENTER button 4 Use the cursor buttons V to choose This All and press the ENTER button to select it This Only the selected program or combination will be initialized All All programs or combinations in bank U will be initialized 5 To execute initialization press the OK MENU button if you decide not to execute press the CANCEL FUNCTION button When you press the OK MENU button a confirmation dialog box will appear press the OK MENU button to execute initialization 109 110 Appendices Initializing the system If operation becomes unstable initial
101. 012 A075 STRINGS 000 A076 022 A098 BRASS 000 A099 015 A114 SYNTH LEAD 000 A115 042 B029 SYNTH PAD 000 B030 028 B058 GUITAR 000 B059 017 B076 BASS 000 BO77 044 B121 DRUM SFX 000 B122 005 B127 USER 000 127 U000 U127 Index number With the factory settings the 256 preload combinations of banks A and B are organized into the categories PIANO DRUM SFX Within each category the combinations are assigned an index number starting with 000 The 128 initialized combinations of bank U USER are assigned to the USER category Category Combination sounds are organized into the 12 categories that are listed in the table above A combination category icon is shown on the upper left side of the display The USER category icon is shown at the left of the PPANO DRUM SFX icon Bank number The bank number indication shows the number used for MIDI transmission and reception Since the conditions for saving will differ depending on the bank this provides a helpful guide For more about banks please see Bank numbers and conditions for saving on page 102 For details on combinations please see the separate Voice Name List Timbre icon information The lower line shows icons indicating the category of the timbre the timbre used by the arpeggiator and the timbre used by the step sequencer U
102. 1 08 make settings for Pitch Pitch Offset Gate Vel Velocity and Flam Pitch Pitch Offset This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Pitch Offset value for each to create a melody using a single tone see Melody pattern Gate Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of LGT Legato the note will continue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a setting of Off the note will not sound Vel Velocity This specifies the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength of how it was actually played The Gate and Velocity settings you select here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters P ARP gt SETUP page of the program that was selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity settings that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the settings in PPARP gt SETUP page Be sure to verify the settings of the program FP ARP SETUP lt SCAN ZONE S 1000 ArpeggioPatterni 00g 1oct d Sort Gate Ste r Latch Velocity Step v Key Syne Swing 887 r Keyboard When specifying Gate Velocity and Swing set the PROG gt ARP page parameters GATE
103. 10082 12 G orr J C364 H GI L R 1 63052 B12 B off FX Control Bus sends the timbre s output to the FX control bus Use this when you want to use a different sound to control the input to an effect You can use the two FX control buses to control effects with a great deal of flexibility see FX Control Bus on page 199 of the Parameter Guide Routing and effect settings Effect settings for audio input Insert effects 1 Access the C FX ROUTING gt IFX page FX 1 BEER 4221 2 GC 89 Stereo Exciter CE 3 3 3 E R SOT St ParametricsEQ GB 4 a 4 E L 906 No Effect Fr 35 4 5 GG 883 Stereo Limiter 2 Select an insert effect for each IFX1 5 and edit its settings 3 Access the C IFX page Select the IFX1 5 pages and edit the effect parameters in each page You can adjust these settings in the same way as a program see page 63 w You can use MIDI to control each effect s dynamic modulation Dmod and the Pan CC 8 Send1 and Send2 following the insert effect These settings are controlled on the MIDI channel specified by Ctrl Ch For timbres that are routed to an insert effect a symbol is shown to the right of the channel number Ch01 16 If multiple timbres with differing MIDI channel settings are routed you can specify here the channel where control will occur Master effects You can adjust these settings in the
104. 2 and following of Recording the performance of the KROSS on page 87 Multi track recording SD card usage during multi track recording When you perform multi track recording the audio recorder stores additional data on the SD card in proportion to the recording time see page 85 If you intend to use the audio recorder for multi track recording you should use an SD card with plenty of capacity Multi track recording procedure To perform multi track recording select an audio song move the time location to the place where you want to start whether at the beginning or in the middle of the song switch sounds or audio input sources if necessary and repeat the steps described in Recording the performance of the KROSS on page 87 Tip If you want to change the volume when you re repeatedly recording the sound of the KROSS you can use the Hold function of Program mode or Combination mode to adjust the balance see pages 28 44 In this example we ll explain how to record a specific region starting in the middle of the song 1 Select the song on which you want to multi track record Press the SETUP button to open the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to choose Audio Song and use the value dial etc to select a song 2 Move to the location where you want to begin multi track recording For details on how to move please see Locate on page 86 Tip It s a good idea to
105. An overview of the audio recorder About the audio recorder The KROSS provides a high quality digital audio recorder that records on an SD card that you insert into the SD card slot In addition to recording the sound of what you play on the keyboard or play back from the sequencer the audio recorder can also record an external audio input such as a mic guitar or audio player that s connected to the KROSS You can also overdub as many times as you like by playing back the recorded audio while recording your KROSS performance or external audio input There s also an Undo function that lets you return to the state prior to the previous take and re record from there These functions let you use the audio recorder like a simple multi track audio recorder The recorded audio data is saved on the SD card as a WAVE file 48 kHz 16 bit so you can use it with your computer You can also import a WAVE file into the audio recorder and play it back The audio recorder gives you an easy way to record your phrases and ideas anytime you re playing regardless of the sound or mode except for Disk mode Recording time and data size The maximum time for one song is three hours The actual total time for a multi track recording will depend on the free capacity of the SD card A single pass of recording will store approximately 11 MB of data per minute This means that 1 GB allows you to record approximately 90 minutes When you perform mu
106. BS FUNCTION button The tabs of TABS OF page will appear VEL ZONE Velocity Zone DELAY PAGES4 4 Press the PAGE button or the PAGE button to select a tab As an example here select KEY ZONE 5 Press the OK MENU button The C ZONE DELAY gt KEY ZONE page will appear eee TIMERE O 1 gt Top Key Top Slope 66 Bottom Slope 66 Bottom Key C 1 Note If you select a page from the page menu rather than from the tabs of menu the page for the previously selected tab will appear Using the MENU button PAGE buttons to move between pages Hold down the MENU button and press the PAGE PAGE button In Combination mode this lets you move in units of pages e g COMBI C INPUT CTRL C Tone ADJ lt C TIMBRE etc Each time the page of the most recently selected tab will be selected Using the EXIT button to move between pages e Pressing this button will take you back to the main page of the current mode Each time you press the button you ll move between pages in the following way The last selected tab page the last selected tab page of the PROG COMBI SEQ or GLOBAL pages gt MAIN page the BASIC page only for Global mode e When a dialog box is open this button cancels the settings that were made in the dialog box and closes the dialog box just like pressing the Cancel button Ifa popup menu is open pressing EXIT closes the menu Selecti
107. Battery life batteries 1900 mAh x 6 Approximately 5 hours Battery life will vary depending on the batteries used and on the conditions of use Output Impedance Headphone output Maximum Level Power Consumption 5W Dimensions KROSS 61 942 x 281 x 91 mm 37 09 x 11 06 x 3 58 WxDxH KROSS 88 1 448 x 383 x 135 mm 57 01 x 15 08 x 5 31 j KROSS 61 4 3 kg 9 48 Ibs Weight KROSS 88 12 4 kg 27 34 Ibs AC adapter KROSS Quick Start Guide XVP 10 Expression Volume Pedal EXP 2 Foot Controller Options DS 1H Damper Pedal PS 1 PS 3 Pedal Switch Specifications Operating requirements Operating requirements KORG USB MIDI Driver Windows Operating system Computer Macintosh Operating system Computer Microsoft Windows XP Home Professional SP3 Windows Vista SP2 including 64 bit Windows 7 SP1 including 64 bit Windows 8 including 64 bit USB port required a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended Mac OS X 10 5 or later Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for running Mac OS X Appearance and specifications are subject to change without notice 121 Music Workstation Model KROSS Function Default Changed MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Recognized Date 2013 02 09 Ver 1 00 Remarks Memorized Memorized Messages Altered x KKK KK K K K K K K K K K Note Number True
108. E E 89 Importing or exporting WAVE files 0 nnana 90 Adjusting the volume cccccceceeeeseeeeeeeneeanes 91 SD card related messageS ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaaes 92 Using Drum Kits ceceeeeee ee 93 Drum Kit Overview cece ee eeee eens eeee eee een eeeeeees 93 Before you start editing 00 ccccce cee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Editinga Drum Kit 0 0 cece cece eee eenee i 94 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data 64 97 How Global Media mode is organized 97 Global settings ccceccccececceccececeecs 97 Basic settings for the KROSS ccceeesseeeeeeeeeneeees 97 MID SettingS ecien deo aea 99 Pedal and other controller settings csccseeeeeeeeeees 99 Creating and selecting scaleS cccceeeeeeeeeeeenaaes 99 Data used by the KROSS ceceecceeeee 100 Saving data cccceccccececcececceccececees 102 Saving data on the KROSS ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneenes 102 Writing to internal memory cece eeeeeeeeee eens 103 Editing Names sis ds caleravicegaccurdognduetes sce Ees 105 Saving toSD card cc cece cece cee eee ea eei 106 Loading data cccccececcsceccscesceceecs 107 Data that can be loaded 0 ee cee cece eect eee ee eeees 107 Loading data from SD card cc ccc cee esseeeeeeeeeeeaees 107 Media utility cece cece cence eee neeee 108 Formatti
109. ETUP button to access the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP page Move the cursor to the audio song and use the VALUE dial etc to select the song you want 2 Press the Stop Reset HJ PAGE button to move to the beginning of the sound 3 Press the AUDIO RECORDER P II button to play back the audio song green LED lit 4 Press the AUDIO RECORDER P II button to pause green LED blinking 5 Press the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button once again to resume playback green LED lit 6 Press the Stop Reset W PAGE button to stop playback and return the location to the beginning AUDIO RECORDER P II button LED unlit Moving the playback location For details on how to move the playback location of an audio song please see Locate on page 86 87 88 Audio recorder Recording an external audio input Here s how to record a vocal part by using a mic that s connected to the MIC IN jack Programs and combinations with input and effect settings that are specifically intended for use with a mic are provided in the Drum SFX category of the KROSS For the procedure please see Recording external audio input on page 19 of the Quick Start Guide Even for other programs or combinations you can use the mic input simply by connecting a mic and pressing the AUDIO IN button to turn it on 1 Adjust the input level for MIC IN or LINE IN see Connecting your input devices on page 18 2 Record as described in step
110. FX4 PORTA Portamento settings IFX5 ENVELOPE Pitch EG settings Master effect type selection and chain P PITCH SETUR settings EG L MOD Pitch EG level modulation settings P MFX g F 7 z R MFX1 T MOD Pitch EG time modulation settings Master effect 1 and 2 settings BASIC Oscillator 1 and 2 filter settings MFX2 MOD Filter modulation settings il h h l P FILTER EGA Filter EG intensity settings detai son ow to eae mode and page please see LFO Filter LFO intensity settings asie ODE suns Som pagecn KTRK Filter keyboard tracking settings ENVELOPE Oscillator 1 and 2 filter EG settings P FILTER m E A a AcE ail alan O T EG EMOD Fiter EG evel modulation settings Switching the screen between oscillator 1 T MOD Filter EG time modulation settings BASIC Oscillator 1 and 2 amp volume and and 2 P AMP pan settings To edit parameters such as the pitch filter or amp of MOD Amp modulation settings oscillator 1 or oscillator 2 use the cursor buttons to select KEY IRK Amp keyboard tracking settings OSC on the upper left and use the ENTER button or the ENVELOPE Oscillator 1 and 2 amp EG settings VALUE dial to select the oscillator that you want to edit P AMP EG L MOD Amp EG level modulation settings T MOD Amp EG time modulation settings osc GEIL G AVX LERGXE LAXE FEROA z OSC 43 LFO1 Triangle 1 WAV Oscillator 1 and 2 LFO1 waveform Phase 000 Offset 00 ae settings Shape 08 A 1 FRO LFO1 frequency and modulation AMS R Off f 66 P OSC sett
111. GNABLE PEDAL jacks 2 Use the Foot Pedal Assign parameter G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page to specify the function that will be controlled by the foot pedal Adjust settings as explained in Assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down Using an SD card You can use an SD card to save or load programs combinations and song data and also for audio recording Types of SD card you can use SD card specifications SD memory cards up to 2GB and SDHC memory cards up to 32GB are supported SDXC memory cards are not supported MS DOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported Media is not included You will need to purchase it separately Formatting media Some consumer electronics products that use SD cards utilize their own proprietary format method Before using an SD card with the KROSS you must format it on the KROSS see page 108 Inserting removing an SD card Inserting an SD card Insert an SD card in the SD card slot With the card label facing upward insert the connector end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until you hear a click 21 22 Setup SD card slot SD card Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you insert it Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage the slot or the card and the data may be lost Removing an SD card he Never remove the SD card from the slot while loading saving or formatting is in progress or while the audio
112. Hz Number of characters in file name The first eight characters are shown File name extension WAV Standard MIDI Files 2 EXTWAVO1 WAV EXTWAV02 WAV Export WAVE files Import WAVE files Programs combinations etc 6 Import WAVE files Existing WAVE files can be imported for use with the audio recorder Files of the following format can be exported and imported Import File format WAV file File bit depth 16 bit Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz stereo files Number of characters in file name The first eight characters are shown File name extension WAV Note Since 44 1 kHz WAVE files will be converted into 48 kHz as they are imported into the KROSS a small amount of time may be required 7 AUDIO folder This folder contains system data and recording data for the audio recorder Do not use your computer to modify this folder The files and folders below this folder are only for the use of the audio recorder Do not rename or modify them Doing so will prevent the system from operating correctly Data used bythe KROSS Creating and selecting scales Files and data structures that the KROSS can recognize The KROSS can load and save the following data Inside a file PCG data and SNG data have the structure that s shown in the following illustration When saving sound data you can select the types of data that will be saved in the PCG file When loading data you can also select
113. KROSS MUSIC WORKSTATION Operation Guide GENERA L Enhanced Definition c B m Jg J Synthesis integrated GIEMS midi fa E Thank you for purchasing the Korg KROSS music workstation To ensure trouble free enjoyment of your new instrument please read this manual carefully and use the product as directed About this manual The manuals and how to use them The KROSS comes with the following manuals Quick Start Guide printed The manuals listed below can be downloaded from the Korg website e Operation Guide PDF this document e Parameter Guide PDF e Voice Name List PDF You can also watch video manuals on the Korg website e Video manual http www korg co jp English Distributors or http www korg com Quick Start Guide This provides a simple explanation of the KROSS s functions To begin please read the Quick Start Guide Video Manual This video illustrates the main functionality of the KROSS Operation Guide this document Put simply the Operation Guide is designed to answer the question How do I do this It explains the names and functions of each part of the KROSS basic operation an overview of each mode how to edit sounds record on the sequencer and so on This guide also explains the basics of effects the Arpeggiator Drum Track and Drum Kits Finally it also contains a troubleshooting guide as well as supplemental information such as a list of spec
114. L R outputs Note In most preloaded drum kits the drum instruments have the same Bus IFX Output Select settings according to their type as follows Snares IFX1 Kicks IFX2 Cymbals IFX3 Toms Percussions other IFX4 5 Use Send1 and Send2 to set the send levels to the master effects 95 96 Using Drum Kits Controlling pan for each key To use separate pan settings for each key 1 Access the PPAMP gt BASIC page 2 Make sure that the DKIT SET check box is checked When DKIT SET is on the Program will use the pan settings for each key of the Drum Kit 3 Access the DRUM KIT gt VOICE page 4 Use Pan to specify the panning for each key Saving Drum Kits Once you ve spent some time editing you ll want to save your work amp The contents of your editing in Global mode are preserved as long as the power is on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your edits you must execute the Write Drum Kits function This will save all drum kits Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data How Global Media mode is organized In Global Media mode you can adjust the following settings e Master tune Key transpose e Effect global button e Global MIDI channel e Creating scales e Damper pedal assignable foot switch pedal e Creating user drum kits e Creating user arpeggio patterns Save load and format an SD card For details on how
115. LINEIN MICIN Recording MONO R Audio Recorder Playback 85 86 Audio recorder Basic operation Audio recorder operations such as record play and undo are performed using the front panel AUDIO RECORDER section SETUP button I button and the four buttons below the audio recorder dialog box that appears when you press the SETUP button Ae Raa Free 2h 29m oor M m mM 7 7001 Ls hiad Ltn H Auto B Off AUDIO RECORDER SETUP mst DOCASNE rLOOP A 0 00 11 B 0 00 15 FUNC UNDO 14 ou FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU SETUP button Accesses the audio recorder setup window PLAY PAUSE gt 11 button Controls recording playback and pause for the audio song The operating status is shown by the color and the state of the LED lit or blinking In each state pressing this button will perform the following actions LED unlit Stopped Press the button to start playback e Green LED blinking Playback paused Press the button to start playback e Green LED lit Playing Press the button to pause playback Red LED blinking Recording paused Press the button to start recording Orange LED blinking Recording paused Start recording by inputting the trigger specified by Auto Red LED lit Recording Press the button to pause recording Audio Recorder Setup window In this window you can control recording stop pause and playback
116. NABLE SWITCH jack see page 20 and pages 164 290 of the Parameter Guide 18 Headphone Headphone jack Connect your headphones here This jack will output the same signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks The headphone volume is controlled by the VOLUME knob 19 Battery compartment The KROSS can be powered by batteries that you install here see page 17 Introduction to the KROSS 1 Power supply Be sure to see the Turning the power on off section on page 15 and follow the correct procedure described there Note The KROSS has an auto power off function that automatically turns off the power when the keyboard or front panel buttons have not been used for a certain length of time With the factory settings this is set to 4 hours see Auto power off function on page 16 Power button To turn the power on or off hold down the power button see page 15 AC adapter connector The included AC adapter is connected here see page 15 M Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may damage your speaker system or cause malfunctions Cable hook Use this to secure the cable of the included AC adapter After connecting the AC adapter loop the cable around the hook that s located on the KROSS s rear pa
117. NPUT CTRL gt FOOT page set the Damper Polarity parameter If you re using the DS 1H choose the KORG Standard setting With the factory settings KORG Standard is selected If the operation is inverted when you use a foot switch other than the DS 1H simply set the polarity to the setting Note The half damper sensitivity is adjusted to a standard value when the KROSS is shipped from the factory If the half damper pedal you re using does not respond appropriately please adjust the sensitivity see page 176 of the Parameter Guide Connecting a foot switch This lets you use a simple foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 or PS 3 as an assignable controller The foot switch can perform a wide variety of functions such as e Selecting programs or favorites e An assignable source for modulating sounds and effects e Portamento on off e Sequencer start stop or punch in out Starting pausing and stopping audio recorder playback or recording Tap Tempo Arpeggiator on off Switch the Drum Track on off Step sequencer RUN on off e Use various KROSS controls modulation wheel SW1 SW2 etc This button will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global Media mode Using a foot switch to select Programs You can select programs by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack By assigning the
118. NTER button to confirm your choice Category an Keyboard gt gt OSC 431 01 gar KROSS Piano mt Pi applic i GB Stereo a0 Piano amper p pupie 004 Brass Ensemble 4 Bottomyel Y 2005 Str Ensemble 1 In the same way select multisample 2 in the P OSC gt MS2 page Select a different Multisample than what was selected for multisamplel Multisamples have now been assigned to multisample 1 and 2 Specify the velocity range and crossfade range Set the multisample 2 Threshold Velocity to 001 and turn Crossfade Off MSL Se OES ESSE OSC 43 1 Octave 018 Transpose 00 aie rece ac 2 a a Stereo G 641 KROSS Piano mf me Peverse Offsel Griff Level 127 Bottomvel E Xfade Off _ G Linear In the P OSC gt MS1 page set the velocity range Bottom Vel to 80 for multisample 1 Velocity Zone Meter or E EEEE SS ELN OSC 431 Octave 018 Transposle 08 ial ee 1 a Rl Stereo Stereo Q ge2 KROSS Piano f Piper 342 Libbey Level 127 poktonvel 3 adie Off Q Linear With these settings Multisample2 will sound for notes played with a velocity of 79 or less and Multisamplel will sound for notes played with a velocity of 80 or greater The Velocity Zone shows the oscillator s four multisamples and the velocity zones of each oscillator The meter on the left shows the note on velocity This lets you see which multisample and oscil
119. POLY r Legato r Single Trigger Single single program uses one oscillator and Double double program uses two oscillators Drums drum program is similar to a single program but uses a drum kit created in Global mode instead of a multisample Polyphony Polyphony is the number of notes that can be played simultaneously such as in a chord The polyphony depends on the program type Program type Polyphony Single 80 Double 40 Drums 80 Note Double Programs use twice as many voices as Single Programs e Stereo Multisamples use twice as many voices as Mono Multisamples e Ifusing velocity crossfade switching the multisample will use twice as many voices as usual Polyphonic monophonic playing To specify whether the program will play polyphonically Poly or monophonically Mono access the PROG gt VOICE page and set the Voice parameter When this is set to Poly you can play both chords and melody lines When this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you ll set this to Poly but Mono is useful when playing sounds such as synth basses synth leads and other solo instruments Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the results Working with Multisamples What is a multisample A multisample is a collection of similarly voiced samples used to create the same type of sound piano bass guitar strings organ across the e
120. Routing Each oscillator has two filters Filter A and Filter B The Filter Routing parameter controls whether one or both of the filters are used and if both are used it controls how they are connected to each other The Single routing uses only Filter A as a single 2 pole 12dB octave filter 6dB for Band Pass and Band Reject The Serial routing uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator first goes through Filter A and then the output of Filter A is processed through Filter B The Parallel routing also uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator feeds both filters directly and allow independent settings for each and the outputs of the two filters are then summed together The 24dB 4Pole routing merges both filters to create a single 4 pole 24dB octave filter 12dB for Band Pass and Band Reject In comparison to Single this option produces a sharper roll off of frequencies beyond the cutoff frequency as well as a slightly more delicate resonance Many classic analog synths used this type of filter Serial and Parallel Routing Serial gt Filter A Low Pass Filter B High Pass Parallel Filter A itera wow as Pass Fiter B High Pass B Fiter B High Pass Pass Filter Types This selects the parts of the sound that will be affected by the filter as described below With the Serial and Parallel routings you can independently set the types for Filter A and Filter B The filters wi
121. Send2 446 FX Control Bus B Off Note The Global setting G SET dialog box is shown above These input settings are used by the entire KROSS see Global audio input settings G SET and individual settings 2 Use the lt gt A Y cursor buttons to set the Select parameter to Line or Mic then press the ENTER button Only the selected input is enabled 3 Use the Gain to adjust the level of the external audio signal Use the lt gt A Y cursor buttons to move the cursor to Gain and adjust the volume of the input signal In general adjust this so that the left and right level meters move to approximately 70 of their full scale Make adjustments so that the sound of the KROSS itself is appropriately balanced with the audio input Note If the input is overloaded the level meter LINE or MIC indicators will be highlighted 4 To change the amount of effects use Send1 and Send2 to adjust the amount of sound that is sent to the effects Tip Although it will depend on the settings of the program or combination Send2 typically applies reverb and Send1 typically applies chorus For more about effect related settings please see Effect settings for audio input on page 65 REM e eves ears G SET Select O Line Mic Pan C064 s rme F mr 1 R eoo WRITE GLOBAL SETTING Are you sure CANCEL oK 5 To save the settings press the WRITE G SET PAGE button A dialog box will appear
122. There are five patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM The functionality of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited User arpeggio patterns There are 1028 patterns 0000 1027 which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing with which you play them In Global ARP PATTERN Setup you can modify these user arpeggio patterns or create a new user arpeggio pattern from an initialized condition Edited user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal memory areas 0000 1027 see page 104 In Media mode you can also save user arpeggio patterns to media Editing a user arpeggio pattern If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern you must first make sure that memory protect is unchecked see page 98 If you enter this mode from the Program mode your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern that s specified for the selected program 1 In Program mode select a program which uses the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit or a program that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio pattern 2 Press the ARP button to turn the arpeggiator on the button will light up Tip Even if you entered Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARP button to turn it on 3 Select the Global ARP PATTERN gt SETUP page Pattern Length Resolution Octave D EET CE lt j GE S 1888 ArpeggioP
123. This can also be controlled via MIDI or by using a controller other than the pitch bend wheel IE Ribbon 16 specifies the amount of pitch change in semitone units that will occur when MIDI control change message 16 is received With a setting of 12 a value of 127 will raise the pitch one octave and a value of 0 will lower the pitch one octave Creating Vibrato You can use an LFO to create vibrato LFO1 and LFO2 Intensity specify how deeply the selected LFO will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will vary the pitch in a range of one octave upward and downward M WhlI Int specifies the amount of vibrato that will be produced by the LFO when the pitch bend wheel is moved fully away from you AMS Intensity specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when modulated by the selected AMS Alternate Modulation Source For example suppose that in the P INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS page you set SW1 to SW1 Mod 80 set LFO1 AMS to SW1 80 and set Intensity to an appropriate value when you now turn on SWI or receive MIDI control change CC 80 vibrato will be applied Modulation Wheel Pitch EG Intensity LFO1 Intensity Intensity Mm eso moo Po OSC 43 PITCH EGZLIO MODULATION EG 00 22 AMS Q Vellocity fs LFO1 Intensity BEER M whl Int 0 AMS B Sw 1 86 AB LFO2 Intensity 66 0 M Whl Int 0 00 ho oO tN AMS AMS Intensity
124. Time function MEDIA gt UTILITY page to specify the current time and date before you save the data gt p 108 Data that you saved from your computer to an SD card does not appear in MEDIA mode Copy the data to the KORG KROSS DATA folder This folder will be created when you use the KROSS to format the card gt p 100 e Is the file name extension format appropriate p 100 Connections with a computer The KROSS does not respond to MIDI data sent from outside Is the USB cable connected correctly p 22 The computer does not detect the KROSS Are the USB cables connected correctly An error occurs when you disconnect from the computer Never disconnect the KROSS from the computer while your host application is in use While connected you are asked to install software ora device driver Does the operating system or version of your computer support the KROSS When using USB sound processing is slow or the tempo is unstable Is the KORG USB MIDI driver installed correctly e You must install the dedicated Korg driver in order to use the KROSS via USB MIDI If your computer s operating system is Windows you ll need to install the driver for each USB port where you connect the KROSS If you connect the KROSS to a different USB port than the one you used when installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver for Windows you ll need to reinstall the KORG USB MIDI driver
125. Up to 16 timbres switchable via key zone or velocity zone layer and crossfade Timbres f ese supported Tone Adjust function allows program settings to be offset Combinations Maximum Polyphony Sound Engine Master Keyboard g These allow you to control external MIDI devices functionality Drum Kits Stereo and mono drumsamples 4 way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes Linear Power Layer The number of 384 Combinations 256 Preload ras o 640 Programs 512 Preload Combinations ogame User Drom Kits a8 Drum Kits 132 Prelad Drum Kits 265 Programs 256 GM2 Programs 9 GM2 Drum Programs 64 16 favorites x4 banks 5 Insert Effects In line processing stereo in stereo out 2 Master Effects Two effects sends stereo in stereo out Effects Total of 134 types select from 74 types for insert effects 101 types of master Effects types effect 1 and 120 types for master effect 2 Dynamic Modulation Effects Control Bus Stereo side chaining for limiter gates vocoders etc Program mode one arpeggiator available Combination and Sequencer modes two arpeggiators available Polyphonic arpeggiators 5 preset arpeggio patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 RANDOM 1028 user arpeggio patterns 916 preload Number of tones 12 tones Number of steps up to 64 steps Program mode One unit Number of tones 12 tones 1 accent tone Number of steps up to 64 Step sequencer Combination mode steps Sequ
126. Voice 0 127 FEI EE EEEE E 0 127 0 127 All note numbers 0 127 can be transmitted by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data Note On Note Off Velocity O 9n V 1 127 X 8n V 64 O 9n V 1 127 x Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Monophonic Channel Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch A receive transmitted only as sequence data A receive Pitch Bend 0 32 1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 16 64 65 66 67 70 79 80 81 82 83 93 91 92 94 14 22 24 6 38 96 97 100 101 0 119 120 121 Control Change KOXXOOOO00O00000 0 00 OO0OO0O00000000000 O OO Bank Select MSB LSB Modulation wheel Controller Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan Expression Effect Control 1 2 Controller Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft Sound controller transmitted only as sequence data C Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFXs TFX Arpeggiator Controllers 6G 72 Data Entry MSB LSB Increment Decrement C RPN LSB MSB C 3 Seq Data C Seq when received All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C Program Change Variable Range O 0 127 KKK RK KKK KKK KKK P System Exclusive Song Position Song Select Tune System Common Clock Command System Real Time Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Aux Messages O 123 127 O x Transmitted only if MIDI Clock is Ext MIDI or Ext USB
127. aes 114 Connections with a computer cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 114 Error M SSAGES cc ccececececscecececececece 115 Error and confirmation messages 0ssecceeeeeeeeeeees 115 Specifications cece ee cece eens ceneenees 119 Operating requirements 0 ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 121 MIDI Implementation Chart 0000 122 Introduction to the KROSS Front and rear panels Front panel 13 1415 16 4 kRoss 0000 D000 II dddo obb bbb TOU mi LL 1 Keyboard The KROSS 61 has a 61 note keyboard velocity sensitive aftertouch not supported The KROSS 88 has a 88 note natural weighted hammer action NH keyboard velocity sensitive aftertouch not supported When playing these keyboards your playing strength velocity can affect aspects of the sound such as the volume and the EG speed allowing you to vary the character of the attack see pages 27 and 38 You c
128. an also make keyboard tracking settings so that the sound will change as you move across the keyboard for example by becoming brighter as you play higher notes see page 37 2 SW1 2 pitch bend wheel modulation wheel SW1 SW2 buttons You can assign various functions to the SW1 and SW2 buttons for each program combination or song You can use these buttons to control program parameters via AMS Alternate Modulation or effect parameters via Dmod Dynamic Modulation KROSS 88 They can also transpose the keyboard by octaves turn portamento on off or lock the Pitch Bend position Each button can work as either a Toggle or Momentary button In Toggle mode the assigned function is switched between on and off each time the button is pressed In Momentary mode the assigned function is active on only as long as you hold down the button In Program mode you can check the assignments of SW1 and SW2 on the PROG gt MAIN page For details please see SW Switch assignment information on page 24 When you write a Program or Combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons is saved Pitch bend wheel Move this wheel forward or backward to control the pitch The center is the normal position where there is no pitch change When you take your hand off of the pitch bend wheel it will return to the center position The amount of pitch change can be specified individually for each program s oscillat
129. an edited program combination song drum kit or user arpeggio patterns etc These renaming procedures can be performed in the following pages Switch Item Page between Program PROG P MEX function Write Program uppercase lowercase COMBI C MFX function numerals and Write Combination symbols SEQ S MFX except for S TRACK EDIT Song function Rename Song S TRACK EDIT function Rename Track ARP PATTERN function Rename Arpeggio Pattern Drum Kit DRUM KIT function Rename Drum Kit MEDIA gt FILE function Save All Save to Std MIDI File MEDIA gt UTILITY function Rename Format AUDIO RECORDER SETUP function Audio song Create New Audio Song Rename Audio Song Export KORG KROSS 1 Select a function from the pages above use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the text edit button Wf OK button Press the OK button to confirm the text you Move the cursor entered or press the EXIT left right button to discard your changes and quit editing Combination Arpeggio Pattern File INSERT button DELETE button SPACE button and press the ENTER button Press the ENTER button Delete the Insert a space at the Thi di ind ill to insert a character at character at the cursor position e text edit window will appear the left of the cursor cursor position 2 Use the cursor buttons lt PAGE and gt PAGE to move the cursor 3 Use the cursor buttons
130. ank U Furthermore settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Time Sig Time Signature Metronome PLAY MUTE and Track Play Loop Saving to SD card including Start End settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode function Save Template Song to write this data for details please seepage 140 of the Parameter Guide A The musical data and setup data of a song you create in Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the KROSS s internal memory You ll need to save this data to a commercially available SD card About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data refers to the data that is loaded in the KROSS when it is shipped from the factory You are free to rewrite this data and with the exception of the demo songs the data will be written to the location as described in Writing to internal memory You can reload the factory preload data into internal memory by using the Global mode Load Preload Demo Data function Preset data on the other hand is data that cannot be overwritten by the Write operation This includes the following data GM program banks GM g 1 8 9 g d e GM drum kits 48 GM 56 GM e Preset template songs POO P15 Preset Drum Track patterns Preset patterns 001 700 The following data can be saved to an SD card commercially available inserted in the KROSS s SD card slot PCG file Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings and user arpeg
131. arameter in the display then holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard C ZONE DELAY nN EY CONE VEL ZONE DELAYS 127 TIMBRE 01 gt Top Velocity 127 Top Slope 66 Bottom Slope 66 Bottom Velocity B64 For timbre 2 set the Top Velocity to 63 and Bottom Velocity to 1 Velocity Zone Slope Similar to Key Zone Slopes as described above these let you fade sounds in and out gradually over a velocity range instead of a simple hard switch We ll make some changes to the example shown above 1 Set the velocity zones of the two timbres so that they partially overlap Set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually rather than abruptly between velocity values 63 and 64 Status settings Adjust these settings in the COMBI gt PROG page This controls the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each Timbre Normally if you re playing an internal Program this should be set to INT If the status is set to Off EXT or EX2 that Timbre s internal sounds will not be played Off simply disables the Timbre entirely The EXT and EX2 settings allow the Timbre to control an external MIDI device USER 000 E InitCombi v amp 2 TIMERE 01 Status MAE PIANO 466 Kross Grand Piano L1 Je 2a 3 a 4 a Se Ee Fe Se ee ee Se 5 For details please see Status on page 71 of the Parameter Guide MIDI settings MIDI Channel Adj
132. arameters such as the song name arpeggiator Drum Track Step sequencer function and effect parameters Tracks 1 16 consist of setup parameters such as each track s program pan and volume located at the start of the song and the musical data itself The tempo track consists of tempo and time signature data see Setup parameters amp Musical data on page 100 of the Parameter Guide Song recording and editing You can record in real time onto tracks 1 16 Realtime recording gives you a choice of six recording modes You can edit tracks 1 16 in units of tracks or measures and you can also edit individual notes and other events For example you can use functions such as Create Control Data to insert a pitch bend aftertouch or control change data Song l Bus Setting Performance Bus Select parameters data l gt Setting Performance pameten aaa g d gt Setting Performance parameters data J gt MIDI Track 01 16 Setting Performance gt parameters data lj e Track J Insert Effects Setting Performance gt Master Effects parameters data J FXCtrl Bus Tempo Track Tempo and time signature data TF I 1 2 Controllers DrumTrack Step Sequencer Arpeggiator Master Effect _ Insert Effect 1
133. ard below B3 you ll hear a bass line arpeggio play bass programs sounded by timbres 4 5 and 9 e The arpeggiator A parameters Bottom Key and Top Key C ARP gt SCAN ZONE page are set so that arpeggiator A will run for the entire keyboard The B Bottom Key and Top Key C ARP gt SCAN ZONE page are set so that arpeggiators B will function only for the note B3 and below e Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 15 as well but this setting is so that timbres 6 to 8 will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Please see the preceding section Combination PIANO 004 Piano Trio Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings that are written to a program or combination will be recalled when you switch programs or combinations or whether the current arpeggiator settings will be maintained With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the program sound This setting is made in LOAD ARP WHEN CHANGING GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page see page 98 71 72 Arpeggiator function Creating a user arpeggio pattern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the KROSS s arpeggiator are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio patterns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns
134. arpeggio in the order of the pitches in the chord you played The Sort parameter lets you select whether the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you played regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes or in the order that you played the notes Checked the arpeggio will play each note in the order of its pitch regardless of the order that you actually played the notes Unchecked the arpeggio will trigger each note in the order that you actually played the notes Sort ae ae oe OFF UP K oe e e ON UP Setting the arpeggio to continue playing even after you have taken your hand off the keyboard The Latch parameter lets you select whether the arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand off the keyboard or whether the arpeggio will stop Checked The arpeggio will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard Unchecked The arpeggio will stop playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your keyboard timing The Key Syne parameter lets you specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the keyboard or whether it will always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo Checked The arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you press a key This setting is suitable when y
135. as a 16 step loop With the appropriate settings you can create a drum loop pattern of up to 64 steps For example if the pattern is 64 steps the A B C and D LEDs will light up consecutively indicating which steps are currently playing You ll also use these buttons to select instruments such as kick or snare and to input accents The Favorites function lets you use buttons 1 16 and the BANK button to assign up to 64 of your favorite programs and combinations to the buttons The selected bank LED and button will light up SETUP button You ll use this button to access the setup page for the step sequencer or in conjunction with buttons 1 16 and the keyboard to select tones or sounds When you turn this button on the SETUP page for Program Combination or Sequencer mode will appear allowing you to turn steps on off and to specify the pattern s resolution length and the sound used for each tone Note The SETUP page won t appear if the Favorites function is on Only the shortcut keys will be available By holding down the SETUP button and pressing buttons 1 13 you can select the tone e g kick snare accent that will be controlled by buttons 1 16 see Tone on page 81 By holding down the SETUP button and pressing a key you can select the sound instrument that s actually played by each tone seepage 82 RUN button When you press the RUN button the button will be lit the step sequencer wi
136. as been used by another device cannot be used as is you must format the SD card before you can use it with the KROSS When you format the SD card all data that had been saved on that media will be erased Be sure to double check the SD card for data before you format kh You must use the KROSS to format the media The KROSS will not correctly recognize media that has been formatted by another device 1 Correctly insert the SD card to be formatted into the SD card slot see Inserting removing an SD card on page 21 2 Access the MEDIA gt UTILITY page You can access the MEDIA page by holding down the EXIT button and pressing the GLOBAL MEDIA button Use the PAGE and PAGE buttons to access the MEDIA gt UTILITY page 3 Select the Format function Press the FUNCTION button Use the Y PAGE button to select Format and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear FORMAT Volume Label fFJINEwW YOLUME CANCEL 4 Press the OK MENU button to format or press the CANCEL FUNCTION button if you decide to cancel When you press the OK MENU button a message will ask you for confirmation Press the OK MENU button once again to execute the Format operation Setting the current time Specify the date and time this is used to record the correct date and time when you save data he The KROSS does not contain an internal calendar or clock you must use the Set Date Time function
137. ate system Meaning Execution of the Update System Software operation did not end successfully e Try the operation again Completed Meaning The processing executed by the command has been completed Completed Please turn the power off and then on again Meaning Execution of Update System Software has been completed successfully Turn the power switch off and then on again to complete the update D Destination and source are identical Meaning When copying or bouncing the same song or track was selected for both the source and destination To solve this problem e Select a different song or track for the source and destination Destination from measure within the limits of source Meaning When executing the Move Measure command for all tracks or within the same track the specified destination measure is within the source range To solve this problem Set a destination measure that is outside of the source range Destination is empty Meaning When editing the track that was specified as the destination contains no musical data To solve this problem e Select a track that contains musical data Destination measure is empty Meaning The measure that was specified as the destination contains no data e Specify a destination measure that contains data Destination song is empty Meaning The song that was specified as the copy destination or bounce destination does not exist e Execute the Create New
138. attern1 GG BE toct fh Note If you move from Program mode arpeggiator A will be automatically selected 4 In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard will not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeggio patterns can be selected they cannot be edited When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will have an effect anytime that this pattern is used in Program Combination or Song 5 In Length specify the length of the pattern After the pattern has played for the length specified it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this example set it to 08 Note For the preload arpeggio patterns 0000 0915 simply changing the Length can significantly change the character of the pattern Try changing the length and listening to the result 6 Adjust settings for the Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Kbd Keyboard parameters These are program parameters but they can be set from here as well If after accessing this page from Program mode you modify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example select the settings shown in step 3 7 In ARP PATTERN gt MODE page specify how the ar
139. atterns e Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable buttons Transmit MIDI System Exclusive data dumps e Save and load Programs Combinations MIDI Songs and Global setup data Format the SD card Export and import sequences to and from SMF Standard MIDI Files Audio recorder e There s an independent audio recorder It can record audio from an external mic or line input or the audio of a program combination or sequencer performance The sequencer and audio recorder are not able to synchronize see page 85 Favorites function e This lets you register programs combinations and audio songs using buttons 1 16 for instant recall Introduction to the KROSS Relational diagram of the KROSS s modes Audio Recorder PROGRAM osc1 Insert Master Effect Multisample 1 IFX1 MFX 1 mmm __ mD Multisample 2 Multisample 3 Cans Multisample 4 Arpeggiator Drum Track Multisample 1 DRUMS PROGRAM CES Multisample 2 Step Sequencer Multisample 3 STEP SEQ PROGRAM C Multisample 4 GLOBAL MODE COMBINATION m Insert Master Effect DRUM KIT i Key Assign TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM TIMBRE 9 PROGRAM 1FX1 MFX1 Drumsample 1 TIMBRE 2 PROGRAM TIMBRE 10 PROGRAM 5 MFX2 TIMBRE3 PROGRAM TIMBRE11 PROGRAM TIMBRE 4 proce TIMBRE 12 program FE TIMBRE 5 PROGRAM TIMBRE 13
140. atus MIDI Channel and Arp Assign settings shown in the display of steps 1 to 3 can be adjusted so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is On and will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off Combination PIANO 004 Piano Trio Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example When you play a specific region of the keyboard this combines settings that cause the arpeggiator to play an arpeggio using different sounds than what s being played by the keyboard with other settings that cause the arpeggiator sounds to remain completely unplayed when the arpeggiator is off Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel G MIDI gt BASIC MIDI Channel is set to 01 Select combination PIANO 004 Piano Trio turn the ARP button on and play To make the arpeggiator performance more clearly audible turn off the DRUM TRACK button e Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 2 3 and 15 COMBI gt ARP page When you play the keyboard the bass riff arpeggio pattern will sound timbres 2 and 3 The A Bottom Key and Top Key C ARP gt SCAN ZONE page are set so that arpeggiator A will function only for notes C4 and lower e Arpeggiator A is also assigned to timbre 15 but this is so that the timbres 2 and 3 program will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for timbres 2 3 and 15
141. aved in Global mode Although you can edit this in the AUDIO IN page or the QUICK SETTING dialog box of each mode you can t save it individually for a program etc Use Bus Bus Select to specify the bus where the audio input will be sent For example if you want the output of the device that s connected to LINE IN to be input to insert effect 1 specify IFX1 as the Bus Bus Select setting when selecting the routing Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send levels from the input to the master effects These settings are available only if Bus Select is set to L R or Off If Bus Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are specified by the Send and Send2 parameters in each FX ROUTING gt SEND page for the signal that has passed through the insert effects amp Depending on the type of effects that you re using on 5 the external audio input and on their settings it is possible for feedback to occur If this occurs adjust the input output levels and the effect settings Take special care when using high gain effects The Level parameter specifies the level of the external audio signal that s being input Normally you ll leave this at 127 6 The FX Control Bus sends the audio input to the FX Control bus Use this when you want to use another sound to control the effect input You can use two separate FX Control buses to control the effects with a great deal of flexibility see
142. bout the Drum Track function please see page 77 Using the step sequencer The step sequencer is a function that plays a KROSS drum program using a drum pattern which you can create in an intuitive way by using buttons 1 16 You can play a program while listening to the rhythm produced by the step sequencer For more about the step sequencer please see page 81 Effects For details please see Using Effects on page 61 Automatically importing a Program into Sequence mode You can use the Auto Song Setup feature which automatically copies the settings of the program or combination and puts the KROSS in record standby mode when you simply press the REC button Then you can press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt I button to begin recording For details please see Auto Song Setup function on page 55 39 40 Playing and editing Programs Playing and editing Combinations About the KROSS s combinations Combinations let you split and layer up to 16 Programs at once A Combination is made up of 16 Timbres Note that you don t have to use all 16 Timbres Each Timbre is assigned a Program along with parameters for key range and velocity zones mixer settings MIDI channel and controller filtering and so on This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing Combinations including a tour of the front panel controllers and basic editing techniques Playing combinations Sel
143. button or the EXIT button your selection will be discarded and you ll return to the combination where you were before opening the list Other ways to select combinations In addition to using the controls on the front panel of the KROSS you can select combinations in the following ways Using a connected foot switch see page 20 e Receiving a MIDI program change message from an external MIDI sequencer or MIDI controller e Selecting a combination that you ve registered in Favorites see page 49 CATEGORY PIANO USER EPIANO SELECT o C a ooo E PianogStrings ASI pt eenceu O01 Sut E P amp Pad ee saa asad eer a 804 Tea Time E P i J T J E a FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU C3 4 amp a 41 42 Playing and editing Combinations Combination categories and numbers The sounds of the KROSS are organized by type into categories within each category an index number is assigned to each sound All combinations are also assigned a bank and combination number that are used to recall that combination via MIDI Note Depending on the bank there are limitations on where a combination can be saved For details please see Saving data on page 102 Category and index number Category Index number bank number PIANO 000 A000 027 A027 E PIANO 000 A028 019 A047 ORGAN 000 A048 014 A062 BELL 000 A063
144. buttons to select a favorite The sound or settings you registered will be recalled Button lit up Note You can use the value dial or the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to recall favorites consecutively Note You can use a foot switch or MIDI foot controller to recall favorites see page 20 and page 291 of the Parameter Guide Registering a sound in Favorites There are two ways to register a sound as a favorite e Directly register a sound as a favorite e Modify an existing favorite registration The two procedures are described below he If you want to keep the registrations and settings that you made for the Favorites function you must save them before you turn off the power To save these settings execute the Write Favorites function see Saving your Favorites on page 50 Directly registering a favorite sound Here s how the sound that you ve selected in Program mode or Combination mode can be directly registered as a favorite 1 In Program mode or Combination mode select a sound see pages 23 41 SO exit A ENTER STEP SEQ SETUP RUN DRUM TRACK j FAVORITES BANK keet ARP a yea e E 8 9 10 2 Hold down the EXIT button and press the FAVORITES button to enter registration mode The bank LED and buttons 1 16 will blink Note If you decide not to register the sound press the EXIT button 3 Use the BANK button to select a bank 4 Press one of the
145. buttons will do and whether each button is on or off based on their current states when the data is saved These settings are adjusted on the following CONTROLLERS pages Mode Page P INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS Combinations C INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS Songs S INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS Programs Note The on off status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons will be preserved when you write the program or combination Note You can use SW1 2 as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources to control program parameters or effect parameters To do so you will normally assign SW1 Mod 80 and SW2 Mod 81 For a complete list of the possible assignments please see page 290 of the Parameter Guide Note If you want to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them see page 103 Arpeggiator settings According to the note data that s received from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator will automatically generate a wide range of phrases or patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns For more about the arpeggiator please see page 67 Drum Track settings You can use the KROSS s rich variety of drum patterns to accompany you with high quality drum programs while you perform using a program Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful way to come up with new phrases For more a
146. d specified you attempted to load more songs than can be loaded In Sequencer mode execute Delete Song to increase the number of songs that can be used and then load the song again NOTICE Overdubbing with this Level setting will attenuate the sections of previous takes by the same amount Use ADJ LVL to adjust the Audio Song and avoid uneven audio levels Meaning This message is shown if the audio recorder Set Play Level function is set to a value other than 0 dB e With this Level setting if you overdub a region of the song while playing back the previous take the volume of the previous take will be lowered only for the recorded region To avoid this problem of lowered volume use ADJ LVL to adjust the audio song level Now writing into internal memory Meaning Now writing to internal memory Never turn off the power while this message is shown Doing so may cause internal data to be damaged R Root directory is full Meaning When attempting to create a file or directory at the root level of the media you exceeded the maximum number of files or folder that could be created in the root directory of that media Delete unneeded files from the root level of the media S Scanning media Meaning Now checking the contents of the SD card Do not remove the card while this message is shown Source is empty Meaning No data exists in the track that you specified as the source e Specify a track that con
147. d as the following files e PCG file e SNG file Cautions when saving If an identically named file exists on the SD cared If a file with the same name already exists on the SD card you will be asked whether you want to overwrite that data If you wish to overwrite press the OK button If you want to save without overwriting press the CANCEL button and rename the file before you save it For details please see page 105 Please note when saving When using Save All PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each timbre or the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs Loading data Data that can be loaded Loading data Data that can be loaded Loading from SD card You can load the following data from SD card e PCG files Programs combinations drum kits global settings including favorites data user arpeggio patterns e SNG file Song MID file Standard MIDI file SMF format e WAV files Import into the audio recorder 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit stereo files Note For details on the SD cards that can be used please see page 21 Loading the preloaded data and demo songs You can load the factory settings and demo songs back into the KROSS s internal memory For the proc
148. d press the Rec Control MENU button the gt I button will blink orange and the recorder will be in the record standby condition Recording will start automatically when you play the keyboard or input audio see Specifying how recording will start Preparing a new audio song 1 Press the FUNC FUNCTION button to access the function list 2 Use the A PAGE button to select Create New Audio Song and then press the OK MENU button The Create New Audio Song dialog box will appear 3 To assign a name to the song press the ENTER button enter a name in the text dialog box and then return to this dialog box see page 105 You can change the name later 4 Press the OK MENU button to create the new audio song On the upper left side of the display the Audio Track will indicate NEW to show that this is a new song where nothing has been recorded Convenient functions for playback and recording Returning to the state before or after recording Undo Redo Convenient functions for playback and recording Returning to the state before or after recording Undo Redo If you re not satisfied with your performance and would like to record it again you can use the Undo function to return to the state prior to recording You can also step back through multiple takes If you want to cancel the Undo function use Redo 1 To cancel the recording press the UNDO PAGE button The UNDO dialog box wi
149. dle of the level meter is highlighted the Gain setting is too high and an overload is occurring in the input stage Lower the Gain value until this indication is not highlighted p 19 e Conversely if the Gain setting is too low the meter will not move very much Adjust the Gain value upward gt p 19 Programs and Combinations Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed Make sure that the OSC Oscillator Mode P BASIC gt BASIC parameter is set to Double or Double Drums p 31 Program does not sound Could the oscillator or amp level be lowered p 28 32 38 Could the program be muted e Switch the Sound in the PROG gt MIXER page for a program or in the COMBI gt MIXER page for a combination A combination does not play correctly after you load data Are the bank numbers of the programs used by the combination the same as when the combination was created Can t write a Program Is the Memory Protect Program or Combination checkbox GLOBAL gt SYSTEM cleared p 98 Banks A D and bank U have restrictions on the categories and banks that allow saving p 102 A program selected for a timbre in a combination sounds different than when played in Program mode When you select a program for a timbre in Combination mode the arpeggiator and effect settings from Program mode are not automatically applied e You can
150. e If Exclusive Mode has a check mark only the track for which Solo was last turned on will play all other tracks will be silent 53 54 Sequencer Recording The sequencer of the KROSS can record your keyboard performance and use of controllers such as the modulation wheel and pitch bend wheel in real time Usually you will use Single Track Recording to record one track at a time Note In addition to Single Track Recording you can also use Multi Track Recording see page 57 Preparations for recording Before you begin recording make sure that the memory protect setting in Global mode is turned off For details please see Protecting the memory on page 98 Selecting a song 1 Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode 2 Choose Song Select e g in the SEQ gt MAIN page Use the cursor buttons lt P V A to choose Song Select and use the value dial to select a song Note Immediately after the power is turned on there will be a single initialized song If there is only one song you won t be able to select other songs Song Tempo Select Location Mode Tempo SS Ee MAN Peo MXR XARRA R mo 43 Manual J 126 60 r LOOP F Mutti R QACAERE rm MAMMA DTE AR papae 5 a 5 Pe Se Sa We 2 eS ae Se 5 Track Select Track settings Assign a program to each track and specify its volume Tip Here we are explaining how to adjust these basic settings ste
151. e Parameter Guide e LFO1 2 on page 38 Using the AMS Mixers The AMS Mixers combine two AMS sources into one or process an AMS source to make it into something new For example this lets you use an LFO to modulate a filter s resonance while also modulating it by an EG Although resonance has only one AMS input using the AMS mixer makes this possible You could also do things such as using the filter EG to control the amount of LFO1 The wide variety of other possibilities include using the modulation wheel to control the amount of pitch EG allowing the pitch bend wheel to apply bend only to notes played while you hold down the foot switch The AMS Mixer outputs appear in the list of AMS sources just like the LFOs and EGs An AMS mixer s output signal can be used to modulate a variety of parameters This also means that the original unmodified inputs to the AMS Mixers are still available as well For instance if you use LFO 1 as an input to an AMS Mixer you can use the processed version of the LFO to control one AMS destination and the original version to control another Finally you can cascade the two AMS Mixers together by using AMS Mixer 1 as an input to AMS Mixer 2 For details please see 12 P AMS MIXER on page 45 of the Parameter Guide Tips for using AMS When adjusting settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modulation will be necessary to prod
152. e ced mew E E cclaletelat lands 11 Setup aisiss a toveesoderasevteneeoesaw 15 Turning the power on off seceeceeeees 15 Connecting the AC adapter ccc cee essee eee eeeenaes 15 Turning the power On cee cseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeaaes 15 Turning the power Off ccceee cess eseaeeeeeeeenaes 16 Using batteries 2225 hcceh n e i ARE eee tals 7 CONMECTIONS essi Seen eeous eer a ees 18 Audio connections cceeeeeeeneee tence tenets enaees 18 Connecting foot controllers ccc ccc ceeeeseeeeeeeeeanaes 20 Using an SD card ccc cec eee esee eee ersero 21 Connecting the KROSS to a computer n nuesa 22 Connecting MIDI devices 0cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeaanes 22 Playing and editing Programs 23 Playing Programs cseceeceecceeceecees 23 Selecting Programs nnonser enn 23 Program categories and numbers 00ececeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Using Controllers cccceceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 24 Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer 24 Quick Layer Split function cceeeceeeees 25 Quick laye enara iine iana ahad wenedwlev eden nage 25 Quick Splits astes earen o ee E EE ONAA cin elec ows 26 Combination settings made by Quick Layer Split 26 Easy program editing s ceeccesceecees 27 Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions 66 27 Adjusting the volume balance
153. e command the target media was not inserted e Insert media and navigate to an appropriate directory that the KROSS will recognize No recording track specified Meaning When performing realtime multi track recording you attempted to begin recording with no tracks set to REC To solve this problem e Set the desired tracks for recording to REC No space available on media Meaning When saving or exporting a file there was insufficient space on the media e Either delete an existing file or replace the media with another that contains sufficient free space No updating was required at this time The KROSS already has the latest version of the system files Meaning When executing the Global mode Update System Software function the update was not necessary because the system is already the most recent version Not enough memory Meaning When starting realtime recording in Sequencer mode the minimum amount of free memory such as memory for the BAR events up to the recording start location could not be allocated To solve this problem Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Not enough memory to load Meaning When you attempted to load a SNG file ora standard MIDI file in Media mode there was insufficient free memory in the sequence memory To solve this problem Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Not enough song locations available Meaning When loading a SNG file with Appen
154. e same category You can 000 127 _ 7 c programs change the category if saving a Writing to internal memory new sound it will be saved in D bank U The following types of data can be written into the internal Z 001 138 GM2 capital memory programs 256 programs and 9 drum programs complying with the 102 Program g1 g9 001 128 GMa variation GM2 sound map Programs of Programs 000 127 in banks A D U programs these banks are read only They Combination gd 001 128 aera cannot be written Combinations 000 127 in banks A B U Seances User programs and initialized Global settings U 000 127 programs programs You can write to GLOBAL gt BASIC G USER SCALE gt ALL Favorite bank U data Combinations e User arpeggio patterns z 0000 1027 Bank Prog No Use scala cla for User drum kits You can overwrite a bank OO INT 47 USER A number that contains a sound User template songs U00 U15 000 127 Preload f the same category Ygu can combinations change the category if saving a Song settings such as the song name and tempo track B new sound it will be saved in settings see page 100 of the Parameter Guide bank U arpeggiator and effect settings can be saved written to Geel User combinations and internal memory However the musical data for song U 000 127 Combinations _ initialized combinations You tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory can write to b
155. e the PROG gt TONE page to do simple editing For more detailed editing you ll use the P BASIC and following edit pages Page Tabs Main content Page Tabs Main content MAIN Select and play programs BASIC Step sequencer program selection and TONE Easy sound editing length settings OSC1 2 Drum Track and step EDIT Step on off entry PROG s P STEP r MIXER sequencer volume adjustment and SEQ INST Instrument settings mute settings MOD Step sequencer effects such as accent ARP Simple arpeggiator editing and swing PINPUT AUDIO IN External audio input settings MIX Drum program selection CTRL CONTROLLERS Sw1 and 2 function settings and tempo BUS Oscillator 1 and 2 insert effect bus setting settings VOICE Basic program settings such as Diy SEND Oscillator 1 and 2 master effect send Oscillator mode level settings P BASIC K d timi ings followi ans Insert effect lecti d chai NOTE ON ey zone and timing settings following IFX nsert effect type selection and chain note on settings SCALE Scale settings MIXER Post insert effect routing settings POSC MS1 MS4 Multisample and drum kit settings IFX1 VEL Oscillator velocity zone settings IFX2 BASIC Oscillator 1 and 2 pitch settings P IFX IFX3 Insert effect 1 5 settings P PITCH MOD Pitch modulation settings I
156. ecified by the Drum Kit If this is unchecked all drum sounds will use the Program s pan position The factory presets and GM drum kits use individual pan positions for the different drums so normally it s best to leave this checked PAMP BASIC XMOD KEYTRE osc 1 Amp Level Pan 264 v DKIT SET AMS B off 7 00 Amp modulation The basic volume level is set by the Amp Level parameter You can then alter this using the modulation sources below Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and the Amp Modulation parameter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference between softly played and strongly played notes P AMP P Gazic o gt mop XKEYIRKA OSC 4 1 amP moDuLATION elocity Intensity Modulation AMS GB Sw 1 86 99 LFO1 Int 00 AMS G M Wheel 01 49 LFO2 Int 04 AMS Q JS 02 40 LFO1 2 Specifies how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s where you set an LFO1 Int Intensity LFO2 Int Intensity value AMS Intensity adjusts the depth of how the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you assign an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For examp
157. ecified range of measures The Erase Measure command can also be used to remove only a specific type of data Unlike the Delete Measure command executing the Erase Measure command does not cause the subsequent measures of musical data to be moved forward Delete Measure This command deletes the specified measures When the Delete Measure command is executed the musical data following the deleted measures will be moved towards the beginning of the sequence Insert Measure This command inserts the specified number of measures into the specified track When you execute the Insert Measure command the musical data following the insert location will be moved backward Repeat Measure This command repeatedly inserts the specified measures for the specified number of times When you execute the Repeat Measure command the measures will be inserted following the measure specified by To End of Measure and musical data following the inserted data will be moved backward Copy Measure This command copies the measures of musical data specified as the From source to the beginning of the measure specified as the To location When you execute the Copy Measure command the existing track data at the copy destination will be rewritten Move Measure This command moves the specified measures of performance data to another measure When you execute the Move Measure command the performance data following the move source measures will move
158. ecording causing an unnatural result Drums amp bass 3dB i ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL 3dB Start overdub recording 7 r Stop If you overdub record the guitar solo after using ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL to lower the volume of the previous take by 3 dB Unnatural volume changes will not occur in the previous take drums amp bass 91 92 Audio recorder SD card related messages In addition to the Song Name the following messages related to the SD card may appear in the Song Name area of the audio recorder NO MEDIA No SD card is inserted UNFORMATTED The format of the SD card could not be recognized NO AUDIO SONG There are no audio songs Note If the SD card is locked write protected a different error message Write protected will appear if you perform an operation that writes to the SD card such as recording Drum Kit Overview What s a Drum Kit A drum kit is a collection of drumsamples drum set sounds such as bass drum snare or cymbals as well as a wide variety of other percussion sounds with each sample assigned to a note of the keyboard e Each key can play a different sound e On each key you can use up to four Drumsamples with velocity crossfades e Each key has separate settings for the most important sound parameters including volume filter cutoff and resonance envelope attack and decay and pitch Each note can be routed t
159. ecting Combinations 1 Press the COMBI button LED lit You ll enter Combination mode Access the COMBI gt MAIN page The upper line of the display shows the page that you re on Ifa different page is shown press the EXIT button several times to access the COMBI gt MAIN page Category type Mode page name Combination number bank number Tabs Tempo Power supply COME lt 4 a lt BROG Ta KERN GRE A PIANO 000 A000 J 072 00 Piano amp Strings 1 4 0515 as Deak Desk lest lest dala Con RPL ARPDTEE Category icon Timbre category Status Bank USER icon Combination name Tip In the COMBI gt MAIN page you can also select combinations by using the cursor buttons Up Down or the value dial 2 Turn the CATEGORY dial to select the category of combination that you want to play The sound select list will appear 1GA aoas 4 e a E Piano amp Strings cenene Sut EP apad US 662 Super E Piano 663 Riders Storm 664 Tea Time E P Tip The sound select list will also appear when you press the ENTER button You can use the cursor buttons lt P to switch categories 3 Turn the SELECT dial to select the combination that you want to play Play the keyboard to hear the sound Tip You can also select combinations by using the cursor buttons A Y or the value dial 4 To return to the MAIN page press the OK MENU button or the ENTER button to close the menu If you press the FUNCTION
160. ects The KROSS provides five insert effects and two master effects together with a mixer section that controls the routing of these effects All of these are stereo in out Specific parameters of these effects can also be controlled in real time from the KROSS s controllers or via MIDI messages using Dynamic Modulation Dmod by MIDI Tempo Sync or by using a common LFO to apply synchronized changes to multiple modulation effects Effect 1 0 Insert Effects Insert Effects IFX 1 5 are stereo in stereo out If you select Dry unprocessed for the Wet Dry parameter the stereo input signal will be output in stereo without being processed by the effect If you select Wet effect applied the processed signal will be output in one of the following ways Wet Mono In Stereo Out e ces Sy Effect Stereo In Stereo Out Effect Insert effect 1 can use the effects S01 Stereo Compressor S63 Rotary Speaker and D00 St MItband Limiter D10 Rotary SpeakerOD Insert effects 2 4 can use the effects S01 Stereo Compressor S61 AmpSim Tremolo and D00 St Mltband Limiter D09 Vocoder Insert effect 5 can use the effects S01 Stereo Compressor S61 AmpSim Tremolo Master Effects Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are stereo in stereo out Send and Send2 determine the send level to the Master Effects With Master effects only the Wet processed signal will be
161. ed into the KROSS lA Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading individual data from a PCG file The KROSS lets you load Programs Combinations Drum kits User Arpeggio patterns individually or by individual banks Be aware that if you change the order of Programs the sounds played by Combinations may also be affected As an example here we will explain how a combination A012 saved in bank A can be loaded into U000 1 Select the combination that you want to load Use the cursor buttons A to select a file and press the cursor button to move to the next level PCG PCG Cmb Combinations Cmb Bank A Cmb 012 FILE 66117 IDG1G Pad amp Di 1K 61 63 2613 00 00 66127 MG11 Dvno Orch 1K 61 63 2013 00 00 661317 a001 2 Rhythm amp _ 3 66147 DH13 Planet Pa 1K 61 63 2613 66 66 Media NEW VOLUME Index EER EMPAPt3 2 Choose the Load selected function Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE button to choose Load selected and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear From B A012 Rhythm amp Bows UGG InitCombi CANCEL 3 Specify the load source combination in the From section and specify the load destination combination U000 in the To section Note The load destination will be bank U 4 Press the OK MENU button to execute loading the loaded combination will be assigned to U000 107 Overall settings f
162. ed volume use ADJ LVL to adjust the audio song level Adjust the volume balance of the keyboard performance or external input e g guitar or vocal that you will be overdubbing next while the audio song plays back For example set this to 3 dB Level D BE dB NOTICE Overdubbing with this Level setting will attenu ate the sections of previous takes by the same amount Use ADJ LUL to ad just the Audio Song and avoid uneven audio levels CANCEL Press the ADJ LVL PAGE button The ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL dialog box will appear ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL Audio Song 000 9 NEW AUDIO SONG EE Level Adjust CANCEL Use Level Adjust to specify the level adjustment The Level value you specified in step 1 will automatically be set as the default so usually you can just press the OK MENU button You can specify the song name as you wish You will return to the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP screen The audio song whose level you adjusted will automatically be selected At this time Set Play Level will be reset to 0 dB so the volume balance you adjusted in step 1 will be reproduced Overdub record additional material see the illustration below Previous take drums amp bass i SET PLAY LEVEL 3dB i i ee Start overdub recording If you overdub record the guitar solo with SET PLAY LEVEL left at 3 dB The volume of the previous take drums amp bass will be 3 dB lower for a portion of the r
163. edure please see Loading the preloaded data on page 109 Loading data from SD card Loading all Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns Here we ll explain how to load all data from a PCG file containing Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings and User Arpeggio patterns in a single operation Before loading this data make sure that the Global mode Memory Protect check box is cleared see Protecting the memory on page 98 1 Make sure that the SD card is in a state that allows loading see Inserting removing an SD card on page 21 2 Access the MEDIA gt FILE page Hold down the EXIT button and press the GLOBAL MEDIA button 3 Use the cursor buttons A Y to select the PCG file that contains the program or combination data that you want to load Note The PCG files and SNG files are at the top level If you don t see them press the cursor button lt to change levels see Files and data structures that the KROSS can recognize on page 101 FMEA FE OL O ONE ogai NEWFILE PCG 3 21M 01 03 2013 48 06 ooz ED NEWFILE SNG 125K 61 63 2613 66 66 Media NEW VOLUME Index EEE 7 4 Choose the Load selected function Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE button to choose Load selected and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear LOAD NEUFILE PCG CANCEL 5 Press the OK MENU button All data from the PCG file will be load
164. eeeeeeeauees 80 Master operation cccccecccceeccccseeseeseeeeeeees 80 Step Sequencer csceseeceeceees 81 Performing with the step sequencer ss008 81 Playback and settings in Program mode 00ee eee eee 81 Step sequencer settings in Combination mode 06 83 Step sequencer settings in Sequencer mode eeeeees 83 Using the step sequencer with Favorites ceeceeeeees 84 Synchronizing the step sequencer 006 84 Audio recorder ccccccccccccees 85 An overview of the audio recorder 44 85 About the audio recorder cccccceeesneeeeeeeneaaaes 85 Basic Operation cece eee cece cece et eeeeeteeeeeees 86 Audio setup window ccc ccceeeeceeeeneeeeeeeneanaes 86 Recording and playing audio se005 87 Preparations 0 sees eee ee E 87 Recording the performance of the KROSS 0eeeeee ees 87 Playing back an audio Song seeceeeeeeeeneeeeeaeees 87 Recording an external audio input cceeeeeee eens 88 Multi track recording ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 88 Preparing a new audio song cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 88 Convenient functions for playback and recording 89 Returning to the state before or after recording Undo Redo 89 Specifying how recording will start 0ceeeeee eee ees 89 Loop playback i cu wt22 neis EET T E T E
165. elect the various Memory Protect check boxes in the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page to prohibit data from being written or loaded or songs from being recorded Battery type Display contrast Auto power off EASIC YSYSVEM gt PREF N Bank Map lt gt KORG Auto Power Off R 4 Hours Sattery Type gt Alkaline LCD Contrast 61 Auto Rec Start Q Note On Auto power off e The GLOBAL gt PREF page Auto Power Off setting specifies the length of time after which the power will automatically turn off when there has been no user input on the KROSS for a specified amount of time see page 16 Battery type setting In order for the remaining battery capacity to be correctly indicated the type of battery in use should be specified Inthe GLOBAL gt PREF page use Battery Type to select the type of batteries you re using Select Battery Type and press the ENTER button to switch the setting Alkaline Select when using alkaline batteries Ni MH Select when using nickel metal hydride batteries Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display e Adjust the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page LCD Contrast setting Tip In any mode you can adjust the contrast by holding down the EXIT button and turning the value dial Global settings MIDI settings MIDI settings In the G MIDI gt BASIC OUT and FILTER pages you can adjust overall MIDI settings that apply to the entire KROSS Global MIDI channel
166. emplate Song operation If you execute the command without checking this only the template song you selected in step 2 will be loaded Press the OK MENU button to load the template song or press the CANCEL FUNCTION button if you decide to cancel When you perform this operation song settings other than Track Play Loop will be copied From OQCHA ALL To Track 61 Measure 661 In the From field select the pattern that you want to copy To actually hear the currently selected pattern press the START STOP gt W button In the To Track field select the copy destination track In the Measure field specify the starting measure of the copy destination Following the pattern name for each of the 700 preset patterns the musical style and the name of the most suitable Drum category program are partially displayed By loading a drum track and the corresponding preset pattern you can instantly set up a drum track appropriate for each preset template song To execute this operation press the Copy MENU button When you execute this procedure the Measure field will count up automatically showing how many measures of the selected pattern have been placed in the selected song You can then copy another pattern if desired or add more measures of the same pattern When you re finished press the Exit FUNCTION button Copying the settings of a combination or program You can copy the setti
167. en recorded on the Tempo track If you press the START STOP gt HM button during the pre count the time signature won t be recorded d anr 7 Adjust other settings as needed Adjust settings for the arpeggiator S ARP page and the MIDI filter S MIDI FILTER page see page 70 If you want you can make adjustments to the sound by using the Tone Adjust function S LOOP TONE gt TONE ADJ EQ ADG pages When you ve finished the above settings basic setup is complete Saving your song parameter settings The song parameter settings that you create here can be saved as a template If you use these settings frequently you can simply load one of the templates you ve saved For details please see Save Template Song Save as User Template Song on page 140 of the Parameter Guide Using template songs Loading a template song is an easy way to create settings appropriate for a particular musical style You can also assign a drum pattern to a track at the same time 1 In the SEQ gt MAIN page press the FUNCTION button choose Load Template Song from the menu and press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear From QZZ vY Copy Pattern to Track too CANCEL 2 In the From field choose the template song you want to load 3 If you check Copy Pattern to Track too a dialog box for copying a drum track pattern will automatically appear after you execute the Load T
168. encer 42 Editing a combination cccceccececceceees 43 Summary of the edit pages o on 43 A suggested approach for editing ccceeeeeeeeeees 44 Restoring edited settings cccscceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 44 Changing the program of eachtimbre eceeee eens 44 Adjusting the mix cccceccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes 44 Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions 05 45 Saving a Combination you ve edited eccee eee ees 45 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches ecceeeeee eens 45 StatUS Settings 6s asec scncitnr cease ban A R E e 47 MIDIS ttINGS ere ar are e rE EE Ghee adress 47 Changing the program settings to match the combination 47 Arpeggiator settings 0 oee 48 Drum Track settings cccccccceeeeee cess eeeeeee seen ens 48 Using the step SeqUueNCel cc cee eeeee eee eeeeeeee eee ens 48 Effe eneeier cia ntae condos tend denne cgvedbhersneles 48 Automatically importing a combination into Sequence mode 48 Favorites function cce000000049 What is the Favorites function 00008 49 Using the Favorites function ccececeeceees 49 Recalling a favorite sound cece cece eee eeeee eee ee ens 49 Registering a sound in Favorites 0cceceeeeeeee eee eens 49 Convenient ways to use favorites 0008 50 Specifying an audio song and program change 66
169. encer mode Can be created for each program combination and song D Track Preset patterns 700 patterns Held in common with sequencer patterns rum Trac Trigger Mode Sync Zone settings can be specified 16 MIDI Tracks 128 Songs Resolution 480 ppq parts per J Tempo 40 00 300 00 bpm 1 100 bpm resolution Sequencer Up to 210 000 MIDI events Counter Measure Beat Tick 16 preset 16 user template songs Recording format Audio format PCM audio format 48 kHz 16 bit Import WAVE format file name extension wav 44 1 kHz 16 bit 48 kHz 16 bit stereo 44 1 kHz is automatically converted to 48 kHz Export WAVE format file name extension wav 48 kHz 16 bit stereo Continuous recording time maximum 3 hours Audio recorder Recording time Total recording time depends on the SD card used approximately 90 minutes per 1GB Number of songs Maximum 200 songs Number of overdub recording passes Depends on the remaining capacity of the SD card 119 120 Appendices Pitch bend wheel Modulation wheel SW1 2 Buttons 1 16 Step sequencer STEP SEQ button SETUP and RUN buttons for control Favorites FAVORITES button BANK button for control LED A B C D also used by STEP SEQ and FAVORITES SETUP PLAY PAUSE D gt I button Displa 240 x 64 pixel LCD backlit Play Adjustable contrast EXIT button value dial Category CATEGORY dial SELECT dial MODE Buttons COMBI PROG SEQ GLOBAL MEDIA VALUE dial curso
170. end2 parameters to specify the pan and routing of the signal following the insert effect If Chain is On the settings that follow the last insert effect will be used FX Control Bus is an exception Pan 8 Specifies the pan Bus Bus Select Specifies the output destination Normally you ll set this to L R Send1 Send2 Specify the send levels to the master effects For this example set them to 127 FX Control Bus The sound that has passed through the insert effect is then sent to the FX control bus This allows you to use a different sound to control the input to an effect You can use two FX control buses giving you a wide range of possibilities for controlling the effects see FX Control Bus on page 199 of the Parameter Guide Routing and effect settings Effect settings for a program 7 In the P FX ROUTING gt IFX page edit the parameters of the insert effect you selected Edit the parameters in the P IFX gt IFX 1 5 pages Effect Parameters Effect On Off PP FXT 1 2 St Parametric4E0 B2 Fc Hz 1 48k 1 6 Gain dB 06 0 B3 Fe Hz 6 30k_ Q 1 6 Gain dB 0 6 B4 Fc Hz 16 4k Q Trim 1 6 Gain dB 60 0 PPIX EN ee FAAN 1 G St Parametric4Ee Trim 166 B1 Type Shelf L B4 Type Shelf H B2 Dyna Gain Src B Velocity Amt dB 86 0 SrcQ Off Amt 8 Wet Dry Wet Dry Effect On Off Turns the insert effect on off This is linked with the on off setting of
171. ent to OUTPUT L MONO and R IFX1 IFXS The oscillator output will be sent to insert effect 1 5 Off The oscillator output will not be sent to OUTPUT L MONO or R or to insert effects 1 5 Choose this if you want to send the sound directly to the master effects at the send levels specified by Send1 to MFX1 or Send 2 to MFX2 P FX ROUTING gt SEND page 3 If you selected L R or Off in step 2 you can use each oscillator s Send1 to MFX1 and Send2 to MFX2 parameters to set the send levels to the master effects Adjust these settings in the P FX ROUTING gt SEND page Gite tee ice CUS gt SEND lt _JjFxX XTIXERS Available when Bus is LZR or Off OSCi Sendi toMFx1 PR Send2 toMFX2 127 oste Sendi toMFX1 127 Send2 toMFX2 127 If Bus Bus Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels from the output of each insert effect to the master effects are specified by the S1 Send1 and S2 Send2 parameters P Fx Routing Mixer page see step 6 of the next section Insert effects 4 FX Control Bus sends the output of oscillators 1 and 2 to the FX control bus Use this when you want to use a different sound to control the sound that s being input to an effect You can use two FX control buses to freely control the sound see FX Control Bus on page 199 of the Parameter Guide Insert effects 1 Access the P FX ROUTING gt IFX page Effect On Off Effect Chain Chain To
172. ering the pattern see Selecting Programs on page 23 2 Press the RUN button to start playback the button will be lit Press the button once again to stop the button will be unlit The drum loop pattern that s saved together with the program sound will play Note The on off state of the RUN button is not saved when you write the program Changing the tempo Use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to set the tempo of the KROSS see page 67 Entering a pattern You ll use buttons 1 16 to enter a pattern 1 Make sure that the STEP SEQ button is lit Buttons 1 16 will turn each of the step sequencer s steps on off 2 Press the RUN button it will light up to start playback 3 Press buttons 1 16 to enter steps Each time you press the SETUP button it will turn on lit or off unlit if this is on sound will be produced FA BANK allen AR 5 9 4 To enter a different tone or switch tones While holding down the SETUP button press buttons 1 12 to switch tones The P STEP SEQ gt EDIT page will appear On this page you can use the cursor buttons A to select the tone that you want to enter You can also use the cursor buttons lt gt to select a step and press the ENTER button to turn it on off P STEP SEQ P BASIC EDIT INST lt Mop lt Tx STEP 1 732 ZONE O IG A 0 STOP Crash H H O H H X ic ACCENT 81 82 S
173. esponding MIDI message will be transmitted and received The checked items will be transmitted and received Editing a combination Status settings The MIDI filters don t turn the functions themselves on or off Instead the filter just controls whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received T TIMBRE O1 gt Enable v Program Change v After Touch r Elsie v Portamento Sw E1 Je 2a 3a 4 See ee S aa a 1 1 1415 6 YY YY YY YO YM WV YO MYO NY YM Su For example if portamento is on portamento will be applied to the internal KROSS sound even if Enable Portamento SW is unchecked As another example let s say that you ve selected a bass Program for Timbre 1 and a piano Program for Timbre 2 with the goal of creating a bass piano split You could choose the following settings so that pressing the damper pedal affects only Timbre 2 s piano sound 1 Access the C MIDI FILTER gt 1 page 2 Un check the Damper Enable Damper box for Timbre 1 3 Check the Damper Enable Damper box for Timbre 2 Changing the program settings to match the combination You can make various changes to Programs within the context of a particular Combination to make them fit better with other Programs or to create particular sonic effects These changes do not affect the original Programs or how those Programs sound in other Combinations see page 77 of the Parameter Guide Timbre oscillator settings
174. etc to change the setting 5 When you ve finished adjusting settings press the OK MENU button Adjusting how the loop pattern will play You can adjust the volume the sense of swing groove and accent for the pattern 1 Access the PPSTEP SEQ gt MOD page P STEP SEQ PeeSiCYEDITY INST mop lt Tux MODULATION CONTROLS Velocity Swing Accent 6 6 32 2 Velocity adjusts the basic volume SWING adjusts the sense of swing and Accent adjusts the volume Modulation Control SWING If Resolution when Steps per Beat X1 Sepi 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt db db db db Dd Dd DS OD Ata EAT AN i ci o hej je To add an accent to a step 1 While holding down the SETUP button press button 13 to select the accent tone 2 Turn on the steps where you want to boost the volume Using buttons 1 16 and the BANK button press the steps where you want to add an accent making those steps light up The volume of all tones in the selected steps will be emphasized 3 The accent volume is adjusted by the Accent parameter on the MOD page as described earlier Performing with the step sequencer To add a sense of swing to the steps 1 On the P STEP SEQ gt BASIC page adjust the Step Bt parameter A swing effect will be added at the following locations see below 2 On the P STEP SEQ gt MOD page adjust the Swing setting Specifying the zone You can use up to 64 steps in a loop pattern The loop pa
175. ettings MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Enable Bank Change Enable Control Change Enable AfterTouch and Enable Exclusive each checked PG p 162 Does the KROSS support the types of messages that are being sent to it PG p 299 Can t recall programs of the desired bank Is the Bank Map setting correct PG p 158 Damper pedal Damper response is wrong Execute the Half Damper Calibration function GLOBAL gt BASIC to correctly calibrate the half damper pedal sensitivity PG p 176 Media Can t format the SD card Does the media meet the requirements for use on the KROSS gt p 21 Is the media inserted correctly p 21 Could the media s Lock write protect switch be on Can t save load data on the SD card Is the media inserted correctly p 21 Has the media been formatted p 108 Could the media s Lock write protect switch be on SD card is not recognized The date of the saved file is incorrect e Remove the SD card and check whether the card s contacts are dirty If they are dirty clean them gently with a dry cloth or a cotton swab Do not use liquids Take care not to touch the contacts directly with your hands or with a metal object The date of the data is wrong The files you saved have the incorrect date The KROSS does not contain an internal calendar Use the Set Date
176. ettings that you had previously been editing 1 While editing turn the Compare function on select the check mark To turn this on press the FUNCTION button to access the function list use the V PAGE or A PAGE button to select Compare and press the OK MENU button The sound that had been saved before you began editing will be recalled 2 When you turn off the Compare function remove the check mark you will return to the sound that you had previously been editing To turn it off select the Compare function once again and press the OK MENU button Note If you edit the settings that were recalled by turning Compare on i e the saved settings the check mark will be cleared and your previously edited settings will be lost Even if you turn Compare on again select the check mark the previous settings will not return Sequencer mode In Sequencer mode you can use the Undo function to make before and after comparisons immediately after using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing an edit on a track For example this can be used effectively when realtime recording a MIDI track for a song 1 Realtime record a MIDI track Take 1 2 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 3 If you turn on the Undo function select the check mark take 1 will be recalled 4 If you turn off the Undo function clear the check mark take 2 will be recalled
177. f As an alternative to the Rec Control button you can also initiate recording in other ways such as by playing the keyboard see Specifying how recording will start on page 89 6 Perform on the keyboard the sound of the KROSS will be recorded You can also record the performance of the Drum Track the arpeggiator and the step sequencer Note Even if you close the setup window the recording or standby condition of the recorder will be maintained 7 To stop recording press the Stop Reset W PAGE button AUDIO RECORDER P II button unlit When you stop you ll automatically return to the time location where you started recording If you press the Stop Reset JH PAGEH button while stopped you ll return to the beginning of the audio song Ifyou press the AUDIO RECORDER P II button during recording you ll pause in the record standby state AUDIO RECORDER gt II button blinking red If you press the Rec Control f MENU button during recording recording will end playback will continue and the location will advance To resume recording press the Rec Control JF MENU button or the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button Playing back an audio song To play back an audio song press the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button Whether you re in Program Combination or Sequencer mode you can play back regardless of the mode you re in 1 Select the audio song that you want to play back Press the AUDIO RECORDER S
178. fect unit Note This jack does not support condenser mics or other mics that require phantom power or plug in power Such types of mic must be connected via a mic preamp or appropriate device LINE IN jack stereo mini type This is an 1 8 stereo mini phone jack Connect it to the output jack of your audio device or external audio source 4 USB USB connector for connecting to computer You can connect your computer to this connector Using a single USB cable your KROSS can send and receive MIDI information directly to and from a computer without requiring a MIDI interface see page 22 Note The USB connector of the KROSS is only able to transmit and receive MIDI data 5 SDcard SD card slot You can insert an SD card here An SD card can be used to store KROSS sounds and song data see page 21 he Since the SD card is accessed directly when you use the audio recorder to play or record an SD card is required in order to use this functionality 6 MIDI MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT connector MIDI lets you connect the KROSS to a computer or other MIDI devices for sending and receiving note data controller gestures sound settings and so on see page 22 Front and rear panels Items in the display 7 Pedals ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack An optional EXP 2 foot controller or XVP 10 expression pedal can be connected to this jack You can use a pedal to apply modulation to sounds or effects or to adjust the
179. ff the pattern will stop This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Start Immediately If blinking The Drum Track pattern will be ready to start It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on message is received This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Wait KBD Trigger 3 Press the DRUM TRACK button once again to stop the Drum Track the button will be unlit Changing the tempo Use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to set the tempo of the KROSS see page 67 Selecting the Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program 1 In the PDRUM TRACK gt PATTERN page use Pattern No to select a Drum Track pattern P DRUM TRACK lt PROGRAM S PATTERN LL Shift 00 Trigger Mode 4 Wait KBD Trigger v Sync v Latch KEY C 1 Ga EIEEE TTT 2 In the P DRUM TRACK gt PROGRAM page the Drum Track Program parameter selects the program that will play the Drum Track patterns GET a UO PATTERN gt PROGRAM DRUM SF x QCR a3 Play Volume 127 Detune 0000 FX Ctrl Bus GB Off Bus Select IFXS MFX Send 1 888 2 00G Note You can only select programs from the DRUM SFX category Note If you ve selected an empty pattern the DRUM TRACK button will not function Setting the volume mute and solo for the drum track pattern In the PROG gt MIXER page you can edit the volume mute and solo settings see page 28 77
180. forward by the corresponding number of measures and the performance data following the move destination will move backward i e later in the song by the same number of measures Create Erase Control The Create Control command creates control change aftertouch pitch bend or tempo data in the specified region of a MIDI track or the tempo track The Erase Control command erases data such as control changes aftertouch pitch bend or tempo in the specified range Quantize This command corrects the timing of MIDI data of the type you specify note data control change aftertouch pitch bend program change etc in the track You can also adjust for swing Shift Erase Note This command shifts moves or erases the specified note numbers in a specified MIDI track and range of measures Modify Velocity This command modifies the velocity values of notes in the specified area so that they will change over time according to a selected curve Rename Track This command renames the selected track You can enter up to 24 characters 59 60 Sequencer Saving your MIDI song In order to ensure that the data you create is reproduced faithfully we recommend that you save your data by using the Save All command so that the programs will also be saved However if you have not changed the program numbers or sounds used in your song saving only the song related data SNG will minimize the size of the data When you turn off
181. function to easily edit the program of each timbre You can assign Programs to each of the 16 Timbres each with separate volume pan and keyboard and velocity zones adjust settings for effects arpeggiator drum track step sequencer Plus you can use up to five insert effects and two master effects Sequencer mode Sequencer mode lets you record playback and edit MIDI tracks You can e Use the sixteen track MIDI sequencer to record and play back songs e Record a single MIDI track one at a time or record as many as all sixteen tracks simultaneously You can also record system exclusive messages e Use multiple tracks to record and play back performances generated by two arpeggiators e Use one track for the drum track pattern and play back or record a drum pattern e Use the step sequencer to easily create drum patterns e Edit songs e Use the KROSS as a 16 part multi timbral sound module e GM GM2 playback is also supported e Use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the program of each track e Use up to five insert effects and two master effects Global Media mode Here is where you can save load data on an SD card You can also adjust overall settings for the entire KROSS and edit drum kits and arpeggio patterns e Adjust settings that affect the entire KROSS such as master tune and global MIDI channel e Create user scales e Create drum kits using drumsamples e Create user arpeggio p
182. g batteries in this way may cause them to leak or burst Continuous operating time Alkaline batteries will allow approximately four hours of usage Battery life will depend on the type of batteries and the conditions of use Replacing the batteries An indicator on the upper right side of the screen shows the remaining battery capacity fm 0 amp Ifyou re using the AC adapter this will indicate amp amp If C is flashing the batteries are almost exhausted Immediately save any important data and either install fresh batteries or switch to using the AC adapter amp If the batteries are exhausted remove them immediately Leaving exhausted batteries installed may cause malfunctions such as battery leakage You should also remove the batteries if you won t be using the unit for an extended period of time Note If the batteries run low you can plug in the AC adapter and continue operation without having to power off Turning the power on 1 Remove the battery compartment cover The battery compartment of the KROSS 61 is located on the bottom panel kh When turning the unit upside down place it on a blanket or similar material to prevent damage to the knobs and dials While pressing the cover latch pull it upward and remove it Q KROSS 88 While pressing from above the A on the cover slide it away from yourself and remove Note The battery compartme
183. gal SMF data Meaning You attempted to load a file that was not a Standard MIDI File Illegal SMF division Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File that was timecode based Illegal SMF format Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File of a format other than 0 or 1 M Measure number over limit Meaning The attempted edit procedure would cause the track length to exceed 999 measures e Delete unnecessary measures Measure size over limit Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the number of events in a measure exceeded the maximum approximately 65 535 events Meaning The attempted edit procedure would cause the maximum number of events in a measure approximately 65 535 to be exceeded To solve either of these problems e Use event editing etc to delete unwanted data Media busy Meaning SD card access was not fast enough to keep up with recording or playback e As you repeatedly delete and write files the file access efficiency may decline In this case you may be able to improve the situation by copying the KORG folder from the SD card to your computer then formatting the SD card on the KROSS and finally writing the KORG folder from your computer back to its original location If this does not improve the situation switch to a different SD card Media not formatted Meaning The media is unformatted Inthe Media mode Utility page execute the Format function on the media
184. ges you can also record parameters such as sound parameters For details on the parameters that can be recorded please see page 152 of the Parameter Guide 3 Stop recording Note Exclusive messages are always recorded on the current track selected by Track Select In this example they are recorded on MIDI track 9 Note In the event edit page you can view the recorded exclusive events and their location Exclusive events are displayed as EXCL To view these events go to the S TRACK EDIT page and select the MIDI Event Edit function Then in the Set Event Filters dialog box check Exclusive and press the OK button A Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different type of event Nor can other events be changed into exclusive events 4 If you go to the page e g S FX ROUTING gt IFX that shows the parameters you ve adjusted in realtime you can watch the recorded changes be reproduced while the song plays back Exclusive messages that will be recorded during realtime recording The following exclusive messages will be recorded see page 152 of the Parameter Guide e Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device e Parameter changes in Sequencer mode e Master Volume universal system exclusive messages assigned to a foot pedal Songediting Song Song editing You can apply a variety of editing procedures to a song The available types of editing procedures are listed below Song
185. gio patterns SNG file Song MID file Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI File SMF format WAV files Audio songs will be exported as 48 kHz 16 bit files Execute the Export function in the Audio Recorder Setup window Please see Files and data structures that the KROSS can recognize on page 101 MIDI data dump The KROSS can transmit the following types of data as a MIDI data dump you can save this data on an external data filer or other device Programs combinations drum kits and global settings Song Sequencer Savingdata Writing to internal memory e User arpeggio pattern For details please see Dump on page 177 of the Parameter Guide Writing to internal memory Writing a Program or Combination Writing saving procedure The Program and Combination settings you ve made in the various editing pages can be saved to internal memory This action is referred to as writing a program or writing a Combination If you want your edited data to be preserved after the power is turned off you must perform a Write operation he Before you can write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode For details please see page 98 he A combination does not contain the actual program data for each timbre but simply references the number of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is used by a combination or exchange it
186. gn Inst To Tone function P STEP SEQ P BASIC EDIT XNSTXMORXMIXS STOP STEP 1 7165 ZONE D E E tea a ee a ee i Bites 1 BD Dry 62 Inst variation category Tone No Note No Inst variation 2 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select Inst variation category and press the ENTER button to switch between categories and All If All is selected you ll be able to choose drum sounds from all instruments If a category is selected you ll be able to choose from instruments of that category amp If the category is set to Inst variation category switching programs may also switch the note number of the Inst variation This is because an instrument of the same category does not exist at the same note number as the program that you changed and therefore a nearby instrument of the same category has been assigned 3 Use the value dial etc to select an instrument You can press the AUDITION PAGE button to hear the sound you selected You can also play the keyboard to hear the candidate instrument If Inst variation category is set to All all keys will produce sound If a category is selected sound will be produced only by the keys where a corresponding instrument has been assigned You can also select by holding down the SETUP button and playing a key 4 To specify the sound for another tone hold down the SETUP button and press a button 1 12 to switch tones or choose Tone No and use the VALUE dial
187. gram changes from a connected external MIDI device see page 300 of the Parameter Guide To select the timbre program via MIDI program change the timbre s status must be set to INT Adjusting the mix Adjusting the volume of each timbre 1 Access the COMBI gt MIXER page Press the PAGE or PAGE button to select the page In this page you can view and edit the pan and volume of timbres 1 16 com TIMBRE 0 1 gt Sound 4 ay Play Pan CG4 Saume azt E Je E a F me A a S ms E a 7 a EET EEEE nn Te a T T 2 Press the cursor button V to choose Volume it will be highlighted 3 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select the timbre whose volume you want to adjust 4 Use the value dial etc to adjust the setting Note If you check Hold Balance function moving any one of the volume sliders volume values will cause the volume of the other timbres to change as well maintaining the relative volume balance between timbres 1 16 This is a convenient way to adjust the overall volume Adjusting the panning of each timbre 1 Access the COMBI gt MIXER page TIMEREO01 b Sound 4 43 Play Pan CA4 Volume g ee 4 a 5 a a 12 3J J m 5 m 5 l COORHOOCOOOOOOOE 2 Use the cursor buttons A V to choose Pan it will be highlighted 3 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select the timbre whose pan you want to adjust 4 Use the value dial etc to adjust the setting Note Timbre pa
188. h your stereo audio system the left minimizing the volume or a cassette radio that has external input connectors 3 Connect a dynamic mic to the MIC IN jack connect the KROSS to the jacks that are marked LINE IN AUX IN or external input You might need to obtain Note This jack does not support condenser mics or other mics that require phantom power or plug in power Such the appropriate adapter plug or conversion cable types of mic must be connected via a mic amp Connecting headphones 4 Turn the AUDIO IN button on lit to enable the amp h Using headphones at high volume for an extended time input may cause hearing damage Please avoid excessively 5 While vocalizing into the mic and playing the high volume levels keyboard of the KROSS slowly turn the VOLUME knob toward the right until both are at the appropriate volume amp The volume of the mic may differ depending on the effect settings of the program or combination that s selected Connections Audio connections Note To adjust the mic volume adjust settings in the AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box Please see Adjusting the audio input below Adjusting the audio input 1 Hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN button The AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box will appear EEE QUE ears G SET Select OD Line Mic Pan C64 _ _ L E etc AR Level FRE lt Play Gain 37_ Bus L R Send1 466
189. he entire KROSS The tempo setting will control the following e Arpeggiator Drum Track e Step sequencer Songs in Sequencer mode Tempo sync LFO Tempo sync BPM delay effects lA The speed of the audio recorder cannot be controlled TEMPO LED This LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo TEMPO knob This knob adjusts the tempo It s a convenient way to make continuous adjustments Note The TEMPO knob and TAP button will not work if the Global Media mode G MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or if this parameter is set to Auto and MIDI clock is being received TAP button You can use this button to set the tempo To specify the tempo use your finger to lightly tap the TAP button The tempo will be specified when you tap twice but you should tap several times for better precision Ifyou lightly tap the TAP button several times at the desired tempo during playback the tempo will change in real time to follow your taps This is a convenient way to adjust the playback tempo to a different speed in real time A Tap tempo control is available whenever the TEMPO knob can be used For example it cannot be controlled during song playback if the Sequencer mode Tempo Mode is set to Auto see page 103 of the Parameter Guide Note You can use the tap tempo control function by pressing the TAP button and also by pressing a foot switch that s connected to the ASSIG
190. helpful to adjust the volume by using the following functions You can make the following adjustments Set Play Level function Temporarily lowers the playback volume of audio songs Note This will change the volume of all audio songs e Adjust Song Level function Applies attenuation processing to the audio song creating a new song Tip Use this function if you want to individually adjust the volume of each audio song e Level Adjust Use the Level Adjust setting during Import or Export About the Set Play Level and Adjust Audio Level functions In the Set Play Level function dialog box setting the Level to anything other than 0 dB will cause the audio song to play back at a volume that is lower by the level you specified This function is convenient when you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio song and your keyboard performance Note The Set Play Level setting applies to all audio songs At this time the following message will appear Please note this if you re overdubbing with the audio song playback level lowered NOTICE Overdubbing with this Level setting will attenuate the sections of previous takes by the same amount Use ADJ LVL to adjust the Audio Song and avoid uneven audio level With this Level setting if you overdub a region of the song while playing back the previous take the volume of the previous take will be lowered only for the recorded region To avoid this problem of lower
191. i gt Bcd 1 Insert OUTPUT L MONO R Oscillator2 HC Filter2 gt HAmplifier2 Effect 1 5 Step Seq Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes you can insert effects to process the sound of each timbre track program Then you can use the master effects to create overall ambience and use the total effect to make final adjustments In Combination mode you can adjust these settings for each combination and in Sequencer mode you can adjust them for each song In Sequencer mode you can switch between effects or modify the effect parameters and record these changes so that effects will switch automatically or effect parameters will be modified automatically as the song plays back Master Effect 1 2 Insert k OUTPUT L MONO R Timbre 1 MIDI Track 1 1 Effect 1 5 Timbre 16 MIDI Track 16 External input or audio in You can apply effects to an external audio input in any mode Program Combination or Sequencer mode To specify the effects that you want to use set the common 61 62 Using Effects input settings of the KROSS in G SET Use Global Settings or use the individual parameters of each mode to specify the BUS or Send settings see Effect settings for audio input on page 65 he Depending on the type of effects that you re using on the external audio input and on their settings it is pos
192. ia Avoid using the media that produced the error F File already exists Meaning When executing a File Rename procedure a file of the same name already exists on the media e Either delete the existing file or specify a different name File contains unsupported data Meaning You attempted to load a WAVE file of a format that is not supported by the KROSS e If possible use a computer to convert the file to a format that the KROSS supports and then load it File is read only protected Meaning You attempted to write or delete a file but the file has a read only attribute Meaning You attempted to save a file with the same name as a read only file that already exists on the media e Save the file with a different name Meaning After using a computer etc to lock the KORG folder KROSS folder or DATA folder you then attempted to save using the Media mode of the KROSS e Use your computer etc to unlock these folders File unavailable Meaning You attempted to load or open a file whose format was incorrect File path not found Meaning When operating the audio recorder or when executing the Delete utility function of Media mode the specified file did not exist e Check the file Illegal file description Meaning You used an invalid file name when attempting to save or export a file e Change the filename you are specifying Filenames not permitted by MS DOS cannot be used as a filename Ille
193. ialog box that appears will differ depending on whether the program or combination is using global settings G SET or individual settings In the upper left you ll see either G SET or PROG or COMBI or SEQ The global setting dialog box contains a WRITE G SET PAGE button by pressing this button you can save the edited settings as global settings For individual settings press the DONE MENU button to close the dialog box and use the appropriate Write function to save the settings For 19 20 Setup details on how to save please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 103 Only in the case of input gain Gain the global setting G SET and the individual setting are shared Use the global setting G SET to save the setting Although you can edit this in the AUDIO IN page or the QUICK SETTING dialog box of each mode you can t save it as an individual setting PROG COMBI SEQ Global setting G SET EEE QUE Saris G SET Select O Line Mic Pan C064 o L E etc AR Level 127 Play Gain Bg Bus G L R Sendi 666 Send2 040 FX Control Bus R Off Individual setting PROG COMBI SEQ CMAN Ee ESTN PROG Select OD Line Mic Pan C064 _ L ME R Level 127 Play Gain Bl us C L R Send1 666 Send2 040 FX Control Bus R Off To create individual settings In addition to using the AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING
194. ically applied directly to the program parameters when you write the program The Tone Adjust values will be reset to zero For details please see page 3 of the Parameter Guide Combination mode The settings of Tone Adjust parameters are written and preserved as the Tone Adjust settings for each timbre For details please seepage 75 of the Parameter Guide 103 104 Overall settings for the KROSS and saving loading data About the Program and Combination edit buffer When you select a program in PROG gt MAIN or a combination in COMBI gt MAIN the program or combination data is called into the KROSS s edit buffer When you then use the various Program or Combination pages to edit the parameters your changes will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing your edits the data of the newly selected program or combination will overwrite the edited data in the edit buffer and your changes will be lost Note When you execute the COMPARE function in Program or Combination mode the data from internal memory the written content will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you
195. ient ways to use favorites Here are some ways to take advantage of favorites for even more convenience For each favorite you can adjust the following settings e Change the sound that s registered see Modifying an existing favorite registration on page 49 e Specify an audio song that will be recalled together with the sound e Specify a program change and bank select that will be transmitted via MIDI You can adjust these settings by editing the favorite To edit a favorite proceed as follows Specifying an audio song and program change 1 Access the edit page as described in steps 1 and 2 of the Modifying an existing favorite registration section on page 49 Favorite Mode Select p Select Internal O External MIDI COMEI en 01G PraCha 668 f AGG Pianos Strin r Send Bank Select 1G 992 MY ASONG2 MSB 646 LSB 00G Gince Lf eros W come L OK Audio Song Setting External MIDI Setting 2 In the edit screen specify the parameters for each favorite If you want an audio recorder song to also be recalled when you use a favorite to recall a sound set the Audio Recorder Setting to specify the audio song number If this is set to Keep Current the current audio song and playback status will be maintained To play back the audio song press the II button Note If you switch audio songs during playback the playback will automatically stop To start playback press
196. ifications Parameter Guide The Parameter Guide is designed to answer the question What does this do Organized by mode and page the Parameter Guide includes information on each and every parameter in the KROSS Voice Name List The Voice Name List lists all of the sounds and setups that are in the KROSS when it is shipped from the factory including Programs Combinations Multisamples Drumsamples Drum Kits Arpeggio Patterns Drum Track Patterns Demo Songs and Template Songs PDF versions The KROSS PDF manuals are designed for easy navigation and searching They include extensive PDF contents information which generally appears on the side of the window in your PDF reader and lets you jump quickly to a specific section All cross references are hyper links so that clicking on them automatically takes you to the source of the reference Conventions in this manual References to the KROSS The KROSS is available in 88 key and 61 key models The manuals refer to all models without distinction as the KROSS Abbreviations for the manuals PG In the documentation references to the manuals are abbreviated as follows PG Parameter Guide Symbols 4 IM Note Tips These symbols respectively indicate a caution a MIDI related explanation a supplementary note or a tip Example screen displays The parameter values shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory purposes and
197. in data that can be accessed by the load or open procedure Alternatively the data is damaged etc and cannot be loaded or accessed The song exists and will be initialized Meaning When executing the Sequencer mode Create New Song function you attempted to create a new song for a song number that already exists If you execute the song will be initialized and a new song will be created and overwritten onto it Ifyou don t want to initialize the currently existing song specify a new song number The system has been idle for more than and will shut down in You can change the Auto Power Off setting on the following page GLOBAL PREF Meaning If there has been no operation for the specified length of time of time the Auto Power Off function will display a message informing you that the power will turn off soon The power will turn off when the countdown time indication reaches zero Ifyou want to continue using the KROSS press a key or switch Auto Power Off will be reset and the same message will appear when the specified length of time has once again elapsed without any operation e Ifyou want to disable this function or change the time setting go to the GLOB gt PREF page and set the Auto Power Off parameter Use the Write Global Setting function to save the setting Y You can t undo last operation Are you sure Meaning Once you enter event editing even if you leave event editing without actuall
198. in the selected mode From the left this shows the initial letter of the mode name and the page name b Tabs Most pages are divided into multiple tabs Use the PAGE buttons to select the tab that you want to see c Parameters The parameters for various settings are shown in the display Use the lt gt A Y cursor buttons to select a parameter d Edit cell Some of the parameters or parameter values will be highlighted when you use the lt P A V cursor buttons This is called the edit cell and the highlighted item will be available for editing Other methods can also be used to adjust parameters that are indicated by the following icons e Popup button If a parameter indicated by this button is selected i e when it is the edit cell you can press the ENTER button to see a popup menu that shows the available parameter values To enter a value for the parameter use the A V cursor buttons f Option buttons If a parameter with this type of button is selected i e when it is the edit cell you can press the ENTER button to choose one of multiple options g Toggle Ifa parameter with this symbol is selected i e when it is the edit cell pressing the ENTER button will switch the function or turn it on off each time you press the ENTER button Introduction to the KROSS h Check box By selecting a check box parameter and pressing the ENTER button or turning the value dial you can select o
199. ination song 5 The KROSS will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will sound according to the Metronome setting see page 110 of the Parameter Guide 6 Press the START STOP gt W button to begin realtime recording To stop recording press the START STOP gt W button once again Copy From Combination and Copy From Program functions In Sequencer mode you can use these functions to copy combination or program settings to a song If you select all of the check boxes in the dialog box the same settings will be copied Creating a new song 1 Press the SEQ button You ll enter Sequencer mode 2 Press the FUNCTION button choose the Create New Song function from the menu and press the OK MENU button SEQ gt MAIN page etc A dialog box will appear Set Length F Select the number dsr NEw MES CANCEL 3 Enter the number of measures in Set Length You can change the number of measures later if necessary see Set Song Length on page 142 of the Parameter Guide 4 If you add a check mark to Select the number you ll be able to specify the number of the new song If there is no check mark the song will be numbered consecutively 5 Press the OK button to create the song Recording MIDI in real time When you ve finished with the Preparations for recording section you can start recording This is a method of recording what you re play
200. inations or songs depending on the arpeggiator A and B settings the arpeggiator might not start even if you turn on the ARP and play the keyboard see page 71 4 Use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to set the tempo The ARP button TEMPO knob and TAP button will apply to both arpeggiators A and B Their state is saved when the combination is written Selecting an arpeggio pattern and adjusting settings You can select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the arpeggiator will function 1 Access the COMBI gt ARP page Arpeggiator control GATE VEL SWING Arpeggio Pattern Select Arpeggiator RunB Timbre Assign B Timbre Assign A LA T T SE 2G Tot ARPS moo GATE 00 AVEL 5 swi G 00 Ai R8757 ir Let s _ J S167 B Subtle R mie f 0 ee a ttoct f PSort toct A v Sort v Lat F Sync F Kbd Ly Lat v Sync r Kbd MM Adjusting settings 2 Notice how the arpeggio changes as described in Arpeggiator control MOD on page 67 and Arpeggio pattern selection and operation settings on page 68 69 70 Arpeggiator function Select the arpeggiator s that will run Use the Arpeggiator Run setting to enable the arpeggiator s that you want to use The arpeggiator s that this is on will run when the ARP button is on However the arpeggiator will only play a timbre if the table next to the check boxes assigns arpeggiator A or B to a timbre T 1 16 You change these sett
201. ing on the keyboard and your controller usage in real time This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the Drum Track function the Step sequencer function and the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you play back existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto KROSS s sequencer in real time Recording setup In SEQ gt REC page Recording Setup select the realtime recording method that you want to use Overwrite By default this recording method is selected This will record your performance by overwriting any previously recorded data All data following the measure where you start recording will be erased Normally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of real time recording or MIDI event editing 1 Use Track Select to choose the track that you want to record Play the keyboard you ll hear the selected track 2 Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite LOOP Loop All Tracks Multi REC 4 Sen oN gt PROG gt MIX REC ARPA flea Hi Time Sig 4 4 METRO G Setup Uation Tempo 4 Manual J 20 00 P LOOP Meiate Miis i Reny Gaii ey Ow M Multi REC 1Le s a Ge E an 7 ee Se See 7
202. ings Start F KeySync Fade 66 Delay 66 LFO i 2 WAV Oscillator 1 and 2 LFO2 waveform settings 2 FRO LFO2 frequency and modulation settings LFO W Common LFO waveform settings Common LFO frequency and P CMN EOE modulation settings LFO KT z KT 1 Common keyboard tracking 1 settings KT 2 Common keyboard tracking 2 settings P AMS 1 Oscillator 1 and 2 AMS mixer 1 settings MIXER 2 Oscillator 1 and 2 AMS mixer 2 settings PARP SETUP Arpeggiator settings SCAN ZONE Arpeggiator trigger region settings P DRUM PATTERN Drum Track pattern selection and trigger region settings TRACK PROGRAM Drum Track program selection Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings Basic oscillator settings Here is where you can specify the type of program select the basic waveform multisample or drum kit and specify whether it will play polyphonically or monophonically poly mono Program type setting single double drum kit Here is where you can specify the program type Broadly speaking the program type will be either a program that uses a multisample or a program that uses a drum kit see Multisamples and Drum Kits below This choice is made by the PROG gt VOICE OSC Oscillator Mode setting which specifies which type the oscillators will use e Multisample Single Double Drum kit Drums abe 12 24194 VOICE MNOTE ON SCALE A osc O Single MERE O Drums voice A Poly O Mono
203. ings in C ARP gt ASSIGN page Arpeggiator Assign see page 70 Arpeggiator A Arpeggiator B For each arpeggiator A and B you can adjust settings for Pattern Select Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard see page 68 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes you can use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously thanks to the KROSS s dual arpeggiator functionality The settings in each of these modes are adjusted in a similar way The following example shows how to adjust settings in Combination mode The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the following things e Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B step 5 e Independently specify whether A and B will run step 6 e Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B step 7 e Select Scan Zone page settings so that you can use the keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B step 8 e Adjust settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off and will sound only when the arpeggiator is On step 10 Arpeggiator settings 1 Select COMBI gt PROG page Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use For this example select any desired program for timbres 1 4 For the timbres that you want to use set the
204. ion list will appear 2 Use the V PAGE and A PAGE buttons to select a function and press the OK MENU button A dialog box for the selected function will appear Check type commands will not display a dialog box their status will be switched and the list will close e Ifyou want to close the list without selecting a command press the CLOSE FUNCTION button once again 3 Use the lt gt A Y cursor buttons to select parameters in the dialog box and use the value dial ENTER button and A V cursor buttons to enter the value You can use the CATEGORY dial and SELECT dial when selecting a program or combination number in the dialog box 4 To execute press the OK MENU button If you decide not to execute press the CANCEL FUNCTION button The dialog box will close Writing saving After editing you should write or save your changes as necessary For example if you ve edited a program your changes will be lost if you select another program or turn off the power The same applies to a combination Settings that you edit in Global mode songs and Favorites will be remembered as long as the power is on but your changes will be lost when you turn off the power unless you write these changes into memory For more details on the Write procedure see the following pages e Programs p 103 e Combinations p 103 e Favorites gt p 50 e Global settings GLOBAL G USER SCALE gt p 104 Drum kits
205. ir Status to INT For this example set Status to INT for timbres 1 4 and Off for timbres 5 16 USER 000 E InitCombi v amp 2 TIMBRE O1 Status QE PIANO 000 Kross Grand Piano 1 Je 2a 3 a 4 ee Se Ee Fe Se ee SS a 5 DE CP XF IXI OFF OF OF OF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 Access the C TIMBRE gt MIDI page Set the MIDI Channel to match the Gch or global MIDI channel set in G MIDI gt BASIC page MIDI Channel For timbres 1 4 set MIDI Channel to Gch C TIMBRE Tor lt O XPICHXSEALES 4TIMBRE 0 4 MIDI Channel Bank Select MSB 666 when EX2 Bank Select LSB 000 1 ee 3e g e 5m ee ae ae O e 1 2 19 1 1 mnl 5 GchGchGchGch 5 6 7 amp 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 Access the C ARP gt ASSIGN page C ARP ASSIGN XA L lt E SCAN ZONES 4TIMBRE 03b RFP Assign QE 2 eal 3 9 9 55 7 12 1 11S Set Temp to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program However the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B Make ARP Assign settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it In the C ARP gt A B pages set the Run Arpeggiator Run parameter Turn this on for the arpeggiator s that you want to use The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARP button is turned on With the settings shown in the display for steps 2 and 3 turning the ARP but
206. izing the system may stabilize it 1 Turn off the power of the KROSS 2 Initialize the KROSS While holding down the EXIT button and button 8 turn on the power of the KROSS The KROSS will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being processed the display will indicate Now writing into internal memory After initialization you ll need to load the preload data In Global mode execute the Load Preload Demo Data function to load the data see page 109 Updating the system You can update the KROSS s system software by loading the most recent system file which you can download to your computer from the Korg website http www korg com e Copy the system file onto an SD card insert the SD card into the KROSS go to the GLOBAL gt BASIC page and execute the Update System Software function For details on the procedure please see the Korg website and Update System Software on page 177 of the Parameter Guide Troubleshooting If you experience problems please see the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power supply Power does not turn on Is the AC adapter connected to an outlet p 15 Did you hold down the power button for several seconds p l5 Is there remaining capacity in the batteries p 17 Power won t turn off Did you hold down the power button for several seconds p l6 Power tur
207. key let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two stereo drumsamples 1 In the DRUM KIT gt DS 1 and DS 2 pages turn Drumsample 1 and 2 on If it is off select the button and press the ENTER button to turn it on PORUM KIT OS OS DSS 054 Voices GECINT Basic Kit 1 E3 v Assign re o a R DRUMSAMPLE 2 n Peverse Offset B 1st Level 00 Transpose 00 Tune 50 2 In the same way make sure that Drumsamples 3 4 are Off 3 Select Stereo as the Bank for Drumsample1 and Drumsample2 Drumsamples come in several types Mono or Stereo Mono are mono drumsamples and Stereo are stereo drumsamples Stereo drumsamples use twice as many voices as mono drumsamples os1 LLU OS 1 O52 055054 voices GECINT Basic Kit 1 E3 v Assign re a a R DRUMSAMPLE 1 se all 4 Select a drum sample Select Drumsample 1 and press the ENTER button A list of drum samples organized by category will appear Use the cursor buttons lt gt to view the list for other categories 150 Normal gt gt rr DB BaCINT Sewanee D Jazz 3 EXs9 D Jazz 4 ExXs9 5 Use the cursor buttons to select a drum sample name from the list in the display 6 Press the ENTER button to make the setting 7 Switch to the DRUM KIT gt DS 2 page and specify Drumsample 2 in the same way Now that you ve assigned Drumsamples to Drumsample1 and Drumsample2 let s set u
208. l always be turned on when the KROSS starts up Arpeggiator recall settings Linking the arpeggiator with programs or combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written into each program or combination will also be selected when you select that program or combination or whether the arpeggiator will stay in its current state without changing settings With the factory settings the former will occur You can choose the latter behavior if you want to play phrases and patterns with certain arpeggiator settings while you switch only the sound between different programs or combinations Ifthe GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page LOAD ARP WHEN CHANGING check boxes are selected for Program and Combination the arpeggiator settings that are written will be recalled when you switch programs and combinations respectively Disabling the arpeggiator Step sequencer and drum track Ifthe GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page ARP SS DT check box is selected the arpeggiators the step sequencer and the Drum Track will be turned off Even if the ARP RUN or DRUM TRACK buttons are on the arpeggiator Step Sequencer and Drum Track will not function Protecting the memory The KROSS provides a memory protect setting that prohibits internal memory from being overwritten this prevents the program combination song drum kit and user arpeggio pattern data from being modified unintentionally To protect the contents of memory you can s
209. l memory If you want to keep the existing data that is stored in internal memory use Save All PCG amp SNG or Save PCG to save your data to the SD card before you continue 1 Access the GLOBAL gt BASIC page Enter Global mode by pressing the GLOBAL MEDIA button If the GLOBAL gt BASIC page is not shown press the EXIT button Master Tune 440 00Hz amp Velocity Curve 4 Normal MIDI After Touch Curve 3 Normal Key Transpose 88 2 Select the Load Preload Demo Data function Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE and V PAGE buttons to select Load Preload Demo Data and press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear Kind OQ BERGE ere een ee CANCEL 3 As the Kind use the VALUE dial etc to choose All Preload PCG and Demo Songs 4 Press the OK MENU button to load the preload data If you decide not to load the preload data press the CANCEL FUNCTION button When you press the OK MENU button a dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK MENU button to execute loading About the data loaded by All Preload PCG When you execute All Preload PCG the following data will be loaded Program Bank A B C D e Combination Bank A B Drum Kit 0O INT 31 INT e User Arpeggio Pattern 0000 0915 e Global Setting If you execute All Preload PCG and Demo Songs the demo songs will be loaded as well as the data above Demo Song S000
210. lator will sound for that specific velocity 7 Set the multisample 1 Xfade to 20 and its Curve to Linear YS TEE OSC 4 1 Octave 018 Transpose 00 OSa E 1 a Gi Stereo Stereo a 862 KROSS Piano f Sevene Offset Dan Level 127 i Bottomvel 080 xfade CAJC Linear Ul Ei Level The state of this split is shown visually in the screen The two multisamples will fade across the range from 80 to 100 with multisample 2 fading out while multisample 1 fades in This produces a smooth change without any sudden switch 8 As needed use the PPOSC gt MS1 page and MS2 page to adjust the Level of the two multisamples Using a drum kit Whatis a drum kit A drum kit is a collection of drum set samples such as bass drum snare or cymbal as well as a variety of other percussion sounds with a sample assigned to each key You ll use Global mode to create and edit a drum kit Up to four drum samples can be assigned to each note of the keyboard and you can use the BottomVel Xfade and Curve parameters to specify how you ll switch between these samples Then in Program mode you can adjust filter and amp settings and specify effects and routing to the audio output jacks see page 93 To use a drum kit in a Program set Oscillator Mode to Drums and choose one of the 48 user drum kits or the 9 GM2 drum kits Selecting a drum kit 1 Access the P BASIC gt VOICE page 2 Set
211. le if AMS LFO1 or LFO2 is set to M Wheel 01 a tremolo effect will be produced when the modulation wheel is moved away from yourself or when CC 1 is received Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the note that you play For details please see Keyboard Track on page 37 Amp EG The Amp EG lets you control how the volume changes over the course of the duration of a note P AMP EG ENVELOPE lt L MoOp T Mmop OSC 43 1 Reset AMS B Off 00 TIME CURVE LEVEL Start 99 Attack 38 4 997r Ocy Brk 69 4 84 Every instrument has its own characteristic volume envelope This is part of what gives each instrument its identifiable character Conversely by changing the volume contour for instance applying a string like Amp EG curve to an organ multisample you can produce interesting and unusual sounds Detailed Editing with Programs Making controller assignments Making controller assignments Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 These on off buttons can perform a number of different functions such as modulating sounds or effects or locking the modulation values of the modulation wheel Also each one may work either as a toggle or as a momentary switch In Toggle mode each press alternates between on and off in Momentary mode the switch only changes for as long as you hold it down Each Program Combination and Song stores its own settings for what the
212. ll appear 2 Specify the take that you want to use from the previously recorded takes and press the OK button When you execute UNDO the UNDO button will be highlighted Note If you record in this state the Redo data will be lost and the UNDO button will return to its original appearance Specifying how recording will start Use the Auto Auto Rec Start setting to specify how recording will start automatically You can make recording start the moment you play a note on the keyboard or when the sequencer starts or when the audio input signal reaches a specific level 1 In the audio recorder setup window set Auto Auto Rec Start For details please see step 3 2 Press the Rec Control II MENU button to enter the record standby condition AUDIO RECORDER gt Il button blinking orange Me SS Free 2h 23m Ee oil me rm AM TRIG C ier COC 7OVT MS Oe ee cone e MQ 280 NEW AUDIO SONG Auto DERE rLOOP A 0 00 11 B 6 00 15 FUNC UNDO I4 on 3 Off Press the Rec Control MENU button or the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button to start recording Note On Recording will start when you play the keyboard SEQ START Recording will start when you press the SEQUENCER PLAY STOP gt W button Input Low Recording will start when the audio input level exceeds approximately 18 dB Input High Recording will start when the audio input level exceeds approximately 6 dB Note It s convenient to
213. ll begin playing You ll hear the drum loop pattern that s specified by buttons 1 16 When you press the RUN button once again the button will be unlit the step sequencer will stop playing BANK button Use this button to select the displayed zone of the step sequencer or to switch Favorites banks If the step sequencer is on with the STEP SEQ button lit up steadily or blinking buttons 1 16 will show the on off Front and rear panels Front panel status of each step You can use buttons 1 16 to turn each step on off A Step 1 16 B Step 17 32 C Step 33 48 D Step 49 64 If the Favorites function is on FAVORITES button lit this button selects the Favorites bank Use buttons 1 16 to select the following Favorites Bank A 1 16 bank B 1 16 bank C 1 16 bank D 1 16 14 DRUM TRACK DRUM TRACK button This button turns the Drum Track function on or off This button also indicates the operating state of the drum track Unlit off Blinking waiting for trigger Lit on see page 77 15 Arpeggiator ARP button This button turns the arpeggiator on off The button will be lit up if the arpeggiator is on see page 67 16 Sequencer You ll use these buttons in Sequencer mode to record and play back MIDI Pause 11 button During song playback or recording press this button to pause the button will light up Press the button once again to defeat pause the button will go dark and resume song
214. ll produce very different results depending on the selected filter type Low Pass This cuts out the parts of the sound that are higher than the cutoff frequency Low Pass is the most common type of filter and is used to make bright timbres sound darker High Pass This cuts out the parts of the sound that are lower than the cutoff frequency You can use this to make timbres sound thinner or more buzzy Band Pass This cuts out all parts of the sound both highs and lows except for the region around the cutoff frequency Since this filter cuts out both high and low frequencies its effect can change dramatically depending on the cutoff setting and the oscillator s multisample With low resonance settings you can use the Band Pass filter to create telephone or vintage phonograph sounds With higher resonance settings it can create buzzy or nasal timbres Band Reject This filter type also called a notch filter cuts only the parts of the sound directly around the cutoff frequency Try modulating the cutoff with an LFO to create phaser like effects Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency I I i Low Pass o 12 24 l 24 168 1 16k 24k k I T 1 i I High Pass s 12 i 24 1 24 168 1k 16k 24k Band Pass B 12 24 24 16a ik 16k 24k I 1 1 I 12 1 I T l i I T 1 12 l I l I Band Reject a 12 24 24 160 1k 16k 24k 1 Cutoff Frequency De
215. log box For more about various objects that you ll see in pages and dialog boxes please see page 7 Adjusting the display contrast To adjust the contrast of the display hold down the EXIT button and turn the value dial You can also adjust the display contrast in the Global mode PREF page see page 98 11 Functions Page Menu You ll use these buttons to access pages in the display and to select or execute functions that provide convenient commands in each page The functions of the four buttons will change according to the page or dialog box that s currently shown FUNCTION button This button shows a function list containing convenient commands on each page PAGE button PAGE button Use these two buttons to move between pages in order to select the page that you want to see The page name or tab that s displayed on the upper part of the page indicates the currently shown page MENU button This button displays the page menu for each mode allowing you to select a page Operations while a dialog box is shown While a dialog box is shown the function of these four buttons will change so that you can perform tasks that are appropriate for that dialog box The functions assigned to the buttons are shown in the bottom of the display FUNCTIONS Write Program Solo Setting Compare Auto Song Setup CLOSE a v oK For example suppose that you re in Program mode and press the FUNCTION
216. loing a timbre You can use the COMBI gt PROG page Solo Setting function to hear the sound of an individual timbre see page 28 Restoring edited settings Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE button will recall the saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing For details please see Compare Undo function on page 12 Changing the program of each timbre Changing the Programs that are assigned to timbres 1 16 is a quick way to dramatically alter the sound of the Combination 1 Access the COMBI gt PROG page Press the PAGE or PAGE button to select the page Category combination select Timbre number Step sequencer on SIN gt PROG lt TIxXER Ake S PIANO 986 E Piano amp Strings 1 v m TIMEREO 1 p Status INT PIAN0 001 pS tic Piano j S a J a O aa 7 aa D aa G ee eS eG Slate wo n a CODED 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 SS est eek lest le lest Category timbre program select Active timbre 2 Press the cursor button V to choose category timbre program select it will be highlighted 3 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select the timbre whose program you want to switch 4 Turn the CATEGORY dial to select a category 5 Turn the SELECT dial or the value dial 6 Press the OK MENU button or the ENTER button to confirm your choice MID You can also switch programs by receiving MIDI pro
217. lti track recording additional data will be stored on the SD card according to the length of the recording Note Recording times are approximate Since song management data is also stored the actual recordable time may be shorter depending on the number of songs Recorded takes and how they play back 0 00 00 2 59 59 7 gt Take 1 Drums Drums E Take 2 Bass Drums Bass i Take 3 Guitar Drums Bass Guitar Rec Data i gt _ Playback The effects designed for use with external audio can be used simultaneously with the insert master effect provided for programs etc see page 65 Signal flow within the audio recorder A Master Return Volume A T Effect 1 2 1 a I Output Level Meter OUTPUT L MONO R N Input Level Meter i Level Level Audio In Set Play Level Line In stereo Mic In mono KE Gain Y Audio Recorder 2Mix Play 2Mix Rec f SD card Recording Keyboard Oscillator E Audio Recorder OUTPUT ects A ge Ext Audio gt LINE IN MICIN Recording HMONONR Playback Audio Recorder OUTPUT Playback L MONO R Overdub Recording Keyboard gt Oscillator PF Audio Recorder OUTPUT fects gt P Ext Audio
218. mbinations or audio songs for the audio recorder to play You can use this function to register favorite sounds or to arrange the sounds you ll use during a live performance in the order that they will be needed STEP SEQ button This button indicates and changes the on off status of the step sequencer If this is lit up or blinking you can use buttons 1 16 to control the step sequencer In Program mode this will always be on In Combination mode or Sequencer mode you can turn it off see STEP SEQ On Off on pages 71 104 of the Parameter Guide If the Favorites function is on turning this button on will make it blink and you ll be temporarily able to use buttons 1 16 to control the step sequencer FAVORITES button Use this button to turn the Favorites function on off and when registering sounds see page 49 To register a sound select that program or combination then hold down the EXIT button and press the FAVORITES button and finally use the BANK button and buttons 1 16 To recall a sound that you ve registered turn this button on and then use the BANK button and buttons 1 16 1 16 buttons These buttons are used with the step sequencer function and with the Favorites function When using the step sequencer these buttons turn the individual steps of the drum loop pattern on off If a step is turned on its button will be lit and the drum sound will be heard By default the sequence will play
219. mbre s Status COMBI gt PROG is EXT or EX2 the note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode The parameters for the Drum Track function are structured in the same way as in Combination mode Assign the Drum Track program to the desired track 1 16 However while a combination triggers the Drum Track pattern on the global MIDI channel a song triggers the Drum Track pattern on the MIDI channel specified by the Input S DRUM TRACK gt CHANNEL Normally you ll set this to Tch With the Tch setting the MIDI channel of the track selected by Track Select will automatically be used as the trigger channel For details please see Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program on page 78 CSS TU Tera PATTERN gt CHANNEL Input Output 16 ee J au G a Be 7 aa Se Se 2S Sl 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 12345 6 7 6 9 A Oh Re yy OT In Sequencer mode you can use the Drum Track function while realtime recording a song track or pattern The note on off data transmitted by the Drum Track pattern can be recorded as events in a track or pattern amp You can t use note data from the internal sequencer as a trigger to start patterns for the Drum Track function When you ve used the Drum Track function with a program or combination to come up with an idea for a song you can then use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start realtime recording
220. mode data can be saved by writing it into the KROSS s memory e Global settings the settings in GLOBAL gt BASIC G USER SCALE gt ALL favorites data Drum kits the settings in ARP PATTERN gt SETUP ARP PATTERN gt MODE e Arpeggio patterns the settings in DRUM KIT gt DS1 DRUM KIT gt VOICE Changes you make to this data will be remembered as long as the power remains on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your changes even after turning the power off you must write them into memory The following are exceptions Parameters that are not saved even if you Write Effect SW Parameters that are saved even if you don t Write LCD Contrast e Auto Rec Start 1 Access the page that contains the parameters or settings that you want to save Choose one of the GLOBAL GUSER SCALE pages if you want to write global settings choose DRUM KIT pages if you want to write drum kits or choose ARP PATTERN pages if you want to write arpeggio patterns 2 Press the FUNCTION button located at the lower left of the display and select Write Global Setting Write Arpeggio Patterns or Write Drum Kits The respective dialog box will appear 3 In the Write dialog box press the OK MENU button If you decide not to execute press the CANCEL FUNCTION button or the EXIT button Savingdata Editing names Text Target Cursor Characters Editing names You can modify the name of
221. move to a point where you can start playback slightly earlier than you begin recording 3 Press the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button to start playback AUDIO RECORDER gt II button lit green A Press the Rec Control amp Jk MENU button to start recording AUDIO RECORDER button lit red Play the keyboard of the KROSS or input audio from the MIC IN or LINE IN jacks To stop recording press the Stop Reset Hi PAGE button AUDIO RECORDER P II button unlit If you press the Rec Control f MENU button during recording recording will end playback will continue and the location will advance To resume recording press the Rec Control h JF MENU button mn Play back and record only the multitrack recorded region Press the Stop Reset button Record pause Press the REC Record pause Control button Stop playback Move manually a A return to start location Multi track Multi track recording recording start location end location Multi track record while playing the entire song Press the REC Press the REC Record pause Control button Control button Record pause Start playback A A Continue playback Multi track Multi track recording recording start location end location To start recording in synchronization with your performance or input You can make recording start automatically when you begin playing the keyboard or when external audio input is received Select the appropriate Auto setting an
222. mported into the KROSS a small amount of time may be required Import procedure 1 Using your computer copy the WAVE file that you want to import into the KORG KROSS DATA folder of an SD card that was formatted by the KROSS 2 Access the MEDIA gt FILE page 3 Select the WAVE file that you want to import 4 Choose the Load Selected function to access the dialog box 92 If you want to rename the song access the text dialog box and enter a name D If the volume of the file you re importing should be adjusted beforehand specify Level Adjust Note After importing you can adjust the playback volume of the audio recorder or apply an individual volume adjustment to each audio song see Adjusting the volume on page 91 Press the OK MENU button to execute the import function The selected WAVE file will be loaded in KROSS audio song format The progress of execution is shown by a progress bar in the display l Note This may take some time depending on the type of file etc During the import procedure you can cancel by pressing the ABORT FUNCTION button 8 In the audio recorder setup window select the song that you imported and play it Exporting a WAVE file A multitrack recorded audio song can be exported as a WAVE file to the KORG KROSS DATA folder of the SD card This lets you use your audio player to listen to an audio song produced on the KROSS or to load the song into your DAW
223. n interacts with the pan stored in the Program A setting of C064 reproduces the Program s oscillator pan settings Adjusting the Timbre Pan will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relationship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Editing a combination Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions The Tone Adjust function is an easy way to adjust the sound of each timbre In the C TONE ADJ gt TONE ADJUST page you can adjust parameters such as the cutoff and resonance in the C TONE ADJ gt EG ADJUST page you can adjust the attack time and release time These adjustments will not affect the original program or the sound of programs that are used by other combinations 1 Access the C TONE ADJ gt TONE ADJUST page or the EG ADJUST page Press the MENU button to access the page menu Use V PAGE or A PAGE to select C TONE ADJ and press the OK MENU button Press the PAGE or PAGE button to select the page C TONE ADJ TONE ADJUST lt _EG ADJUST S TIMBRE 0 1 gt Cutoff Resonance 66 EG Intensity 66 Vel Intensity 00 0 Je E ae F e I ee 1S e E a HS eis a i a i i a I i i p i TIMBRE 01 gt Attack 2 Decay 00 Sustain 00 Release 00 2 Use the cursor buttons lt gt to select the timbre whose sound you want to adjust 3 Use the cursor button
224. nel so that the cable won t get pulled out inadvertently Leave enough slack on the plug end so that you can disconnect it if you want to see page 15 he Be careful not to bend the base of the plug any more than necessary 2 Audio output OUTPUT L MONO R jacks These are stereo audio outputs For stereo connections use the L MONO and R jacks For monaural connections use the L MONO jack Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the volume see Connecting your output devices on page 18 3 Audio input This jack lets you input audio from an external source the audio can be recorded on the audio recorder or sent through the internal effects and output via the OUTPUT jacks To make adjustments such as input gain Gain hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN button to access the AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box You can also adjust these settings in the AUDIO IN page of each mode he The input gain Gain can be saved as a global setting G SET see Global audio input settings G SET and individual settings on page 19 he You cannot use the MIC IN and LINE IN input signals simultaneously In the setting screen mentioned above you must choose the input that you want to use For more about connections and settings please see Connecting your input devices on page 18 MIC IN jack 1 4 phone type This is a 1 4 phone jack You can connect a dynamic mic an active type guitar or a guitar ef
225. ng SD Card cece cece eee e eens seas eee eeneenaees 108 Setting the current time 0 0 ccc eee ee eee ee eee ee eee enes 108 vi Table of Contents Appendices scecceccscsseeees 109 Restoring the factory settings see00 109 Loading the preloaded data cccsceceeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Initializing the user bank cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 109 Initializing the system 2 0 cece cece ee ee cence een ae ees 110 Updating the system cecceseeeeeeee 110 Troubleshooting cccceccecacceccsceceecs 110 Power Supply o sis vescsan dens EEEE ove nae cress vaca snenens 110 Problems at start up nnes enses eessen 110 Basic operation screen and functions 0eceeeeee eens 110 Rudio Output msie einser A E EEE ENE AAEE 111 AUIOINDUE nica icesccasd vee hes sector ueeidere eeke horis 111 Programs and Combinations 0ccecceeeeeeee eens 112 SOQUENCEM acson ceva she Svtacend E a eerie 112 Alpe QQ iatOl ieri setaicwiebuieneulvaket ces dace osu deosdins 113 Drum Track function 0 e cece cence cence eee eeenee ees 113 DIU KIS anaien E des nih ean ee Seren tenner E RE 113 Effects so sses EAE ig vuavbercee diay uererncn 113 Step SeQUENCER sonion citer e E dah ane T mention 113 Audio recorder i n E 113 MID eer ar e i E E E DEERE 114 Darmiper pedal lt s 0 cnrareais science EEEE LEETE 114 Media 2 5 cacten a aden TE ovale EE vundten wad tee bee
226. ng a parameter and editing the value 1 Use the lt gt A Y cursor buttons to select the parameter that you want to edit 2 If you select an edit cell the display will be highlighted Edit the value The way that the value will change depends on the type of parameter or object see Items in the display on page 7 The value in the edit cell can be edited by using the value dial the ENTER button and the A V cursor buttons VALUE dial Use this dial to edit the selected parameter s value This control is convenient when you want to scroll through a very long list of selections 12 Introduction to the KROSS ENTER button and A V cursor buttons When you select a parameter and press the ENTER button a A Y symbol will appear beside the value EEEJ 836 and you can use the A V cursor buttons to increment or decrement the value in steps of one When you ve specified the value press the ENTER button once again to confirm it This method is convenient when you want to make small changes Note If you decide not to change the value press the EXIT button Using the keyboard to enter a note number or velocity value For parameters that specify a note number such as G4 or C 2 or a velocity value pressing the ENTER button will cause a A V symbol to appear beside the value see above You can play a key to directly enter a note number or velocity value When you ve specified the value press the ENTER bu
227. ngs of a combination or program into the sequencer This can be done in the following ways Auto Song Setup Auto Song Setup is a function that copies the settings of the selected combination in Combination mode or program in Program mode to the song in Sequencer mode Copy From Combination or Copy From Program functions see pages 138 139 of the Parameter Guide In Sequencer mode you can use these functions to copy the desired settings Auto Song Setup function 1 2 Enter Combination mode In COMBE gt MAIN page select the desired combination and edit the Arpeggiator etc as desired Note If you want to save the edited state of the combination use the Write Combination functions Press the REC button Alternatively select the Auto Song Setup function The Setup to Record dialog box will appear Setup to Record Do you continue CANCEL 55 Sequencer 4 To execute the Auto Song Setup function press the REC button or the OK MENU button If you decide not to execute press the CANCEL button You will automatically move to Sequencer mode and the settings of the combination will be copied to the song The step sequencer s RUN on off setting and the Drum Track s on off setting when Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately will not be copied If you want to use these settings press the appropriate buttons to turn them on The first unused song will be the copy dest
228. ns off Could the Auto Power Off function be enabled p 16 Problems at start up After you turn the power on nothing appears on the display or the display is very dim or dark The KROSS works correctly when you play the keyboard or perform other operations Adjust the display contrast by holding down the EXIT button and turning the value dial You can also make adjustments using the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page LCD Contrast setting p 98 After you turn the power on the contents of the display remain unchanged for a long time and the KROSS does not work correctly when you play the keyboard or perform other operations It may be that the data on the SD card is damaged Remove the SD card from the KROSS and start it up If the KROSS starts up normally don t use that SD card It may be that the internal data of the KROSS is damaged Such a state can occur if writing to internal memory did not end successfully for example if you powered off the KROSS while a program or other data was being written to internal memory Initialize the KROSS system Initializing the system Basic operation screen and functions Can t change modes or pages Could the sequencer be recording playing paused or in the record ready state Could the function dialog box be displayed You can t change modes while a function dialog box such as WRITE PROGRAM is open Can t turn
229. nt cover is t a at located on the left p S side of the front panel E E 2 Install batteries A When inserting the batteries be sure to observe the correct polarity and Place the end of each battery against the tip of the spring and press it into place KROSS 61 3 Close the battery compartment cover Close the cover by reversing the steps you took to remove it In order for the remaining battery amount to be displayed correctly you must set the Global Media mode GLOBAL gt PREF page Battery Type setting to specify the type of battery that you re using Specifying the type of batteries you installed After you ve installed the batteries turn on the power and specify the type of batteries you re using 1 In the GLOBAL gt PREF Preferences page select the Battery Type parameter Perform steps 1 3 of Changing the auto power off setting on page 16 GLOBAL P GASIC V SYSTEM PREF Bank Map Auto Power Off GB 4 Hours Battery Type lt E i LCD Contrast 00 Auto Rec Start Note On 2 Press the ENTER button to switch the setting Alkaline batteries Alkaline Nickel metal hydride batteries Ni MH 3 Save the setting Press the FUNCTION button
230. ntire keyboard as the basis of a program For each oscillator you can assign up to four multisamples and switch between them by velocity Multisamples and Drum Kits Multisamples and Drum Kits allow you to play samples in different ways e Multisamples lay out one or more samples across the keyboard If we use the example of a simple guitar multisample one sample could be assigned for each string so that the multisample would consist of six samples e As the name suggests Drum Kits are optimized for playing drumsamples Velocity switch crossfades and layers Each oscillator provides four velocity zones This lets you switch between multisamples or drumsamples according to the velocity speed at which you play a key By specifying the threshold boundary value where each zone will respond and the amount of crossfading the overlap between zones you can specify how your keyboard playing dynamics will switch or layer the multisamples or drumsamples You can use this to make the following types of setups e Velocity switch where multisamples or drumsamples are cleanly switched at the threshold e Velocity crossfades where multisamples or drumsamples are smoothly crossfaded over a specified range outside the threshold e Velocity layers where two multisamples or drumsamples are layered when you play a specified range outside the threshold Note If Oscillator Mode is set to Drums the velocity settings
231. o different Insert Effects or have separate FX Send amounts For instance you can send a snare sound through a dedicated compressor You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose Oscillator Mode is set to Drums Drum Kit memory structure The KROSS has over 161 Drum Kits divided into Internal User and GM General MIDI groups as shown below You can edit or write into any of the locations except for the GM bank which cannot be erased Drum Kit contents Contents Preload Drum Kits User Drum Kits GM2 Drum Kits The 9 Drum Kits in the GM bank are compatible with the GM2 sound map The other Drum Kits may use different mappings where appropriate Using a drum kit in a program Oscillator Mode In the P BASIC gt VOICE page set the Oscillator Mode parameter to Drums Then for the oscillator select the drum kit that you want to use Before you start editing Selecting a drum program Drum Kits are edited in Global Mode While you re in Global Mode you play the kit that you re editing as if you were playing it from within the Program Combi or Song which was selected before you entered Global mode So before you enter Global mode it s best to select a Program which is already set up for drums with the appropriate EG settings effects and so on In Program mode you should select a drum program from the DRUM SFX category Matching the key of the keyboard with the Drum Kit
232. o edit see page 30 3 Select a Waveform Step through the various waveforms and notice their shapes shown in the display There are a number of waveforms to choose from Each are suited to different applications Triangle and Sine are the classic LFO shapes for vibrato tremolo panning and filter wah effects Square is useful for gated on and off filter and amp effects and can create trills when modulating pitch The Guitar waveform is designed especially for guitar vibrato it bends only upwards from the base value Saw and Exp Exponential Saw Down are good for rhythmic filter and amp effects Random 1 S H creates the classic sample and hold effect which is great for modulating a resonant filter 4 After looking at the different waveforms select Triangle 5 Select the Shape parameter and use the VALUE dial to move through its different settings from 99 to 99 Notice how the shape of the waveform becomes more curved and how 99 emphasizes the lower part of the shape and 99 emphasizes the upper part Detailed Editing with Programs Creating time varying changes LFO and EG 6 Select the Phase parameter and use the VALUE dial to sweep through its range of values Notice how the waveform shifts from side to side Among other things this lets you offset the LFOs from one another in time which can create interesting organic effects 7 Use the Fade and Delay settings to control the way the LFO s
233. o function on page 12 Saving your edits After you ve edited a program you must save it if you want to keep the changes you ve made If you re select the program or turn off the power after editing your edits will be lost For details please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 103 You can also save programs on an SD card as PCG files For additional details please see Saving to SD card on page 106 Detailed Editing with Programs Before you start editing Detailed Editing with Programs You can create original sounds by editing a preloaded program or by editing an initialized program For details please see Saving your edits on page 28 Before you start editing The three elements of sound pitch tone and volume Sound is made up of three basic elements pitch tone and volume The KROSS provides pitch filter and amp amplifier sections that allow you to control these elements The pitch section modifies the pitch the filter section modifies the tone and the amp section modifies the volume Pitch settings are made in the P PITCH and P PITCH EG pages filter settings are made in the P FILTER and P FILTER EG pages amp settings are made in the P AMP and P AMP EG pages EG LFO AMS and controllers In addition to the three elements listed above a sound can vary according to the passage of time the pitch range in which it
234. o that you don t have to manually switch between the two If external clocks are being received they control the KROSS tempo If external clocks are not being received the KROSS uses its internal tempo instead e This setting is made by the G MIDI gt BASIC page MIDI Clock parameter If this is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or is set to Auto and MIDI clock is being received the PROG gt MAIN page and similar pages will show J EXT and the tempo of the KROSS will be synchronized with the external MIDI device In this case you won t be able to change the tempo from the KROSS Pedal and other controller settings In the G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT page you can assign foot controller functions and specify the polarity see Connecting foot controllers on page 20 Assignable button and Assignable Pedal settings JERR subi o FooT oo Foot Switch amp Pedal 7 Damper Foot Sw Assign ii Foot Pedal Assign B Off Damper Polarity 4 KORG Standard l Foot Sw Polarity lt KORG Standard Damper pedal and assignable switch polarity settings Creating and selecting scales You can create an original scale in the G USER SCALES gt OCTAVE and ALL pages You can create sixteen User Octave Scales which allow you to specify the pitch of each note in an octave which will then be applied across all octaves and you can create one User All Note Scale which allows you to individually specify the pitch for every
235. obMod1_ 0 2420 H 00 The Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings control the basic amount of EG modulation for filter frequencies A and B respectively before other modulation The Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings let you use velocity to control the amount of EG modulation The Filter EG AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the Filter EG that s applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a single AMS source with separate intensity A or B settings LFO modulation You can modulate the filter via LFO1 LFO2 and the Common LFO Among other applications LFO modulation of the filter can produce the classic auto wah effect The P FILTER gt LFO I Intensity page lets you set up the following parameters separately for each LFO OSC lt 1 LFO INTENSITY Intensity to A E 00 LFO1 JS Y Intensity to A 00 E 00 AMS B Sw 1 3380 7 20 E 00 LFO2 Intensity to A 00 E 00 Intensity to A and Intensity to B specify how much the LFO changes the tone The AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the LFO applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a single AMS source with separate intensity settings For example if AMS is set to SW1 80 turning SW1 on will apply an auto wah effect see page 35 Keyboard Track Most acoustic instruments get brighter as you play higher pitches At its most basic application ke
236. of effect or the parameter settings If this occurs adjust the external audio signal s input level output level or effect parameters Take care especially when using high gain effects When using the MIDI Tempo Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Some effects such as 19 St Analog Record generate noise intentionally It is also possible to create oscillation using a filter with resonance These are not malfunctions Note that if you use the following effects with the routing described below a feedback loop will be created possibly producing a loud noise Please use caution If the signal from an oscillator or timbre track output or the signal after an insert effect is sent to the FX Control bus and that signal is output directly with this output sent to the FX Control bus a loud noise may be output It is also possible that a DC component will be output at the maximum level producing silence When using the S03 Stereo Limiter or S06 Stereo Gate and the Env Sre Envelope Source of these effects is set as either FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and Trigger Monitor is On When using D09 Vocoder with the Mod Sre Modulator Source set to FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and the Mod Hi Mix Modulator High Mix set to other than 0 Can t play chords Could the program s
237. ogram you selected in step 2 then specify its volume and pitch Program Select the program If you used the CATEGORY dial and the SELECT dial press the MENU button to close the list Default setting category STRINGS index number 000 Volume Adjust the volume 0 127 of the program you selected above for the Program to be layered Default setting 127 Octave Adjust the pitch of the program you selected above for the Program to be layered in one octave steps 2 1 0 1 2 Default setting 0 Use ARP This check box copies the arpeggiator settings of the program you selected above in the Program field Default setting not selected Note You can t change the settings of the first program piano Note The next time you open this dialog box the last specified settings will be selected as the default When you re finished press the WRITE MENU button The save dialog box will appear Q kross Grand Legato Str rl Category B PIANO _ 14 WRITE To O DEER CANCEL Specify the combination name the category and the save destination Combination name If you want to edit the name select the combination name and press the ENTER button Enter a name in the text window see page 105 By default this will show the first 11 characters of the two program names joined The two program names will be separated by for Quick Layer or by for Quick Split Category
238. on The AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box will appear 6 Note which input jack is enabled by the Select parameter The input jack where the option button is on is enabled To change the input use the lt gt AV cursor buttons to select Line and press the ENTER button to turn it on EEE QUE Sarkis G SET Select MERE OMic Pan C064 L iine R Level 127 Play Gain 86 Bus G L R Send1 666 Send2 66 FX Control Bus B Off Note It s not possible to input audio via both the LINE IN jack and MIC IN jack simultaneously 7 Use the Gain to adjust the level of the external audio signal Also adjust the volume control of your audio player to set the appropriate volume 8 If necessary save the setting as described in step 4 of Adjusting the audio input above Global audio input settings G SET and individual settings The audio input of the KROSS is affected by settings that are shared by the entire instrument Global settings G SET and by individual settings that are made independently for each program combination or MIDI song With the factory settings the programs combinations and MIDI songs are set to use G SET by default For some sounds individual settings have been made for the vocoder sound or vocal effect Tip Sounds with individual settings are stored in the DRUM SFX category Hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN button the AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING d
239. ones playing a single note on the keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same number of tones 10 Set the parameters for each step Use Vel Velocity etc to add accents to the rhythm pattern VA The Gate and Vel Velocity settings you select here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters P ARP gt SETUP page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded according to the settings of the P ARP gt SETUP page Check the settings of the program When specifying Gate Velocity and Swing set the PROG gt ARP page parameters GATE VEL and SWING to 00 Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio pattern in Sequencer mode If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be affected by your editing 1 In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select a combination where both arpeggiators A and B are assigned 2 Press
240. or combination timbre and song track You can also assign the pitch bend lock function to either the SW1 or SW2 buttons and use it to lock the pitch at the current position of the wheel so that the pitch will stay where it is after the wheel is released Introduction to the KROSS Modulation wheel Move this wheel away from yourself to control various program parameters or effect parameters If the wheel is moved all the way toward yourself the effect will be zero The modulation wheel will stay in its position when you release it and the effect will continue The function that is controlled by the wheel is assigned by the program parameters or effect parameters Although different effects are assigned for different programs and combinations a vibrato effect which cyclically varies the pitch is typically assigned to the modulation wheel 3 Volume VOLUME knob This knob adjusts the volume of the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R outputs as well as the volume of the headphone jack see page 15 4 Sound selector CATEGORY dial Use this dial to select the sound category of the program or combination SELECT dial Use this dial to select a variation sound within the category that s currently selected A sound select list will appear You ll also use this when selecting a program for each of the timbres 1 16 of a combination or when selecting a program for each track 1 16 of a song When you use these two dials a s
241. or the KROSS and saving loading data Loading songs for use in Sequencer mode SNG As an example here we will explain how to load a song Tip If you want to use edited programs drum kits or user arpeggio patterns in a song load those programs i e PCG file after or before you load the song 1 Perform steps 1 3 under Loading all Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns on page 107 Select the SNG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted FILE 6601 GMSNEWFILE PCG 3 21M 61 63 2013 66 66 6902 GRBNEWFILE SNG 125K 61 83 2013 00 00 Media NEW VOLUME Index EER ey 2 Choose the Load selected function Press the FUNCTION button Use the A PAGE button to choose Load selected and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear LOAD NEWFILE SNG Select SNG Allocation REE CANCEL 3 Use Select SNG Allocation to specify the destination where the song data will be loaded Append will load the song into the song number that follows the song s that currently exists in internal memory without leaving a vacant number Clear will erase all songs from internal memory and load the songs into the numbers from which they were saved 4 Press the OK button to execute loading kh Never remove the media while data is being loaded Media utility Formatting SD card Newly purchased media or media that h
242. orting a combination into Sequence mode You can use the Auto Song Setup feature which automatically copies the settings of the program or combination and puts the KROSS in record standby mode when you simply press the REC button Then you can press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt I button to begin recording For details please see Auto Song Setup function on page 55 Favorites function What is the Favorites function 1 loogoUDooO b b b bb This function lets you register your favorite combinations or programs using the 16 front panel buttons so that you can recall them instantly You can register not only sounds but also audio recorder songs and recall them along with your sounds for immediate playback You can also register MIDI program changes to a favorite as a way to easily recall sounds on an external MIDI device Using the Favorites function Recalling a favorite sound 1 FAVORITES BANK Ape ARP 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 LICICI 1 2 1 Press the FAVORITES button to turn on the Favorites function FAVORITES button lit up FAVORITES A 1 4 8 3 9 12 13 16 AGS comeBl aga2 The First T AG4 PROG AGOS Upright Pia 2 Press the BANK button to select a bank BANK LED lit up MAG 1 PROG AGa4 Vivid Piano AG 2 comBl Agaa a PianoaStri 3 Press one of the 1 16
243. ote on the keyboard 8 For timbre 2 and timbre 3 set the Top Key to B3 and the Bottom Key to C 1 Key Zone Slope In addition to hard splits where the sound changes abruptly you can use the Slope parameters to gradually fade a sound in or out over a range of keys We ll make some changes to the example shown above 1 In the example above you could set the Bottom Key of timbre 1 to G3 and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4 so that these two timbres overlap 2 Next if you set the Bottom Slope of timbre 1 to 12 and set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12 the sound will change gradually instead of changing suddenly nEri 4 TIMERE O gt Top Key G4 Top Slope 12 Bottom Slope 66 Bottom Key C 1 Creating Velocity Switches Next let s create a simple velocity switched Combination like the diagram below Timbre 1 Brass 1 Timbre 2 Strings 64 Velocity 63 1 switch MEUN MUM Access the COMBI gt PROG page Select a brass sound for Timbre 1 and a string sound for Timbre 2 3 For timbres 1 and 2 set the Status to INT 4 Access the C TIMBRE MIDI page 5 For timbres 1 and 2 set the MIDI Channel to Gch Global MIDI channel 6 Access the C ZONE DELAY gt VEL ZONE page For timbre 1 set the Top Velocity to 127 and the Bottom Velocity to 64 You can also enter a velocity value by moving the cursor to the p
244. ou want the arpeggio to start from the beginning of the measure as you are playing in realtime Unchecked The arpeggiator will synchronize to the MIDI clock timing Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you play The Keyboard parameter lets you specify whether the notes that you play on the keyboard will be sounded along with the arpeggiated notes Checked The notes you play on the keyboard and the notes played by the arpeggiator will both be heard Unchecked Only the arpeggiated notes will sound Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator will function In P ARP gt SCAN ZONE page you can specify the range of notes keys and velocities where the arpeggiator will function FP ARP P SETUP gt SCAN ZONE KEY Bottom Top VELOCITY Bottom Top E c9 001 127 EEEIEE mae Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode In Combination mode the KROSS provides dual arpeggiators allowing you to run two arpeggio patterns simultaneously 1 In Combination mode select a combination see Selecting Combinations on page 41 2 Each time you press the ARP button the arpeggiator will turn on or off Tip As you select various combinations you ll notice that the ARP button LED will light up for some combinations see Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations on page 71 3 If the arpeggiator is on an arpeggio will start playing when you play the keyboard In some comb
245. ound select list will appear in the display The display will show category select icon if these dials are available for use 5 Modes Press one of these buttons to enter the corresponding mode The KROSS has four operating modes The currently selected mode button will be lit up see Selecting modes on page 11 PROG button This button selects Program mode Programs are basic sounds in Program mode you can play and edit programs COMBI button This button selects Combination mode Combinations are sets of programs with split or layer settings you can use a combination to create sounds that are more complex than a program In Combination mode you can play and edit combinations SEQ button This button selects Sequencer mode In this mode you can record play and edit MIDI songs GLOBAL MEDIA button This button selects Global Media mode In this mode you can adjust overall settings for the KROSS edit drum kits and arpeggio patterns and save or load data using an SD card If you hold down the EXIT button and press the GLOBAL MEDIA button the media page will appear 6 Quick layer split Here you can easily create layered or split sounds using two programs Select the first sound in Program mode then press this button In the dialog box that appears select the second sound and specify its volume then confirm the settings Choose LAYER if you want the two sounds to play together across the entire keyboa
246. ounds at the beginning of the note 8 Access the P OSC LFO gt 1 FRQ page 9 Use the FREQUENCY parameter to set the speed of the LFO Poway T FRO JA OSC 43 1 ILF01 Motion Normal O Stop FREQUENCY Manual O MIDI Tempo Sync AMS1 Note Number 00 IntModaMs B Off Z 868 AMS2 DB M wheel 01 08 For more information on LFOs please see page 39 of the Parameter Guide All of these parameters control the way that the LFO works In order for the LFO to actually affect the sound you can use the dedicated LFO routings on the Filter Pitch and Amp pages or use the LFOs as AMS sources for a wide variety of parameters Using EGs Envelope Generators An envelope creates a modulation signal by moving from one level to another over a specified time and then moving to another level over another period of time and so on The Program includes three EGs for Pitch Filter and Amp These produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively They can also be used to modulate a number of other program parameters via AMS note on Attack Level note off Break Level Y Level Release Level Sustain Level gt KI Time Release Time L Decay Time Slope Time Attack Time Start Level Note The parameters that can be modulated by an EG and the range of values will differ depending on the EGs provided for each section 33 34 Playing and editing Programs
247. our performance e Play back Drum Track patterns while you perform using a Program e You can use the step sequencer to easily create drum loop patterns You can play a program while a drum pattern plays back You can also perform simultaneously with the arpeggiator and drum track e Edit Programs You can use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the program You can use the quick layer split function to easily layer two programs or create split sounds You can adjust the parameters and settings of the oscillators filters amps EGs LFOs effects arpeggiator drum track etc You can use up to five insert effects and two master effects Plus you can create drum programs using drum kits as created in Global mode Combination mode Combinations are sets of up to 16 programs that can be played simultaneously letting you create sounds that are more complex than a single Program In Combination mode you can e Select and play Combinations e Use multiple timbres to play arpeggio patterns generated by two arpeggiators e Use one timbre for the drum track pattern and play back a drum pattern while you perform e Use the step sequencer to easily create drum loop patterns You can play a combination while a drum pattern plays back You can also perform simultaneously with the arpeggiator and drum track e Use the KROSS as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator Edit Combinations You can use the tone adjust
248. p by step but in the section that follows we will tell you how these settings can be adjusted automatically e Using template songs on page 55 e You can also use Copying the settings of a combination or program on page 55 1 Assign a program to each track Press the PAGE button to access the SEQ gt PROG page Category Track Status Program Select SEQ Pran FROG Tx REC ARPS 601 61 600 Goga new sonli v fig TRACK 01 1 b Status 2 8TH BTH PIANY 486 EE D 1e2 3 4 5 5 7 l 11 12 13 14 15 16 FR unau Nuus A MT Track Select Track Info Use the cursor button V to choose Program Select Use the cursor buttons lt P to select the track whose program you want to specify Use the CATEGORY dial and SELECT dial to choose a program you can also use the value dial to choose a program The procedure is the same as when assigning a program to each timbre of a combination see page 44 Tip You can copy various settings from Programs or Combinations see pages 138 139 of the Parameter Guide Use Status to specify whether each track will play the internal and or external sound generator Normally when using the KROSS you will select INT or BTH INT During playback the KROSS s internal tone generator will play the MIDI data recorded on that track When you use the KROSS s keyboard or controllers you will be playing and controlling the track selected
249. p the velocity ranges and crossfades 8 For Drumsample 2 set Bottom Vel to 1 Turn Xfade Off Use the cursor button WV to scroll the page PORUM KIT os Ose lt Dsa0sa voce GECINT Basic Kit 1 E3_ v Assign DRUMSAMPLE 2 A a G Stereo G 483 SD Jazz 2 ExXs9 Attack 66 Decay 05 BottomVel HJ Xfade Off_ G Linear Editing a Drum Kit 9 In the DRUM KIT gt DS 1 page set the Drumsample 1 Bottom Vel to 80 Now Drumsample2 will sound when you play softly at velocities of 79 or less and Drumsample1 will sound when you play harder with velocities of 80 or more PORUIT KIT dest eae Bite G BBCINT Basic K ee SS E3 v Assign DRUMSAMPLE 1 m EE ae A Stereo B 907 S0 Jazz 1 Exso _ JEE Attack 00 Decay 05 Bottomyel EEE Xfade Off_ G Linear The meter to the left side of the Velocity Zone graphic indicates the note on velocity value This lets you verify the drumsample that will be sounded by a given velocity 10 Next set Drumsample1 s Xfade to 20 and its Curve to Linear Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges tapering into one another Between 80 and 100 Drumsample2 will fade out and Drumsample will fade in creating a gradual velocity transition instead of a hard split o51 LUT OS 1 OSS 055054 voices BOCINT Basic Kit 1 E3 v Assign er a a r DRUMSAMPLE 1 G Stereo B 007 SD Jazz 1 ExXs9 z 4 Fine tuning the sound
250. parameter is selected If the STEP parameter is not selected timbre 16 can be used as a conventional timbre PIANO 000 E Piano amp Strings 1 v DIE TIMBRE 0 1 Status Q INT PIANO 001 Acoustic Piano Deo 3m4 m 5mm E a aa ee MEAD OSs Jest leek lest lek lot Tot let on o Step sequencer settings in Sequencer mode In Sequencer mode track 16 is used by the step sequencer It will be used if the SEQ gt PROG page STEP parameter is selected If the STEP parameter is not selected timbre 16 can be used as a conventional track Note If you press the RUN button during the recording pre count the step sequencer will start in synchronization with the beginning of song recording 11 12 13 14 15 16 XD S DDD 3 No yo X 19 l 1 i 1 0 16 1416 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 i i A A AS A AD NPN be 9355 i oy me eh 83 84 Step sequencer Using the step sequencer with Favorites When using the Favorites function the settings of each registered program or combination can make the step sequencer play A You ll be able to turn steps on off but the settings cannot be saved Nor can you enter the various STEP SEQ pages You ll need to use Program mode or Combination mode to edit the step sequencer settings Playing and stopping the step sequencer 1 Select a favorite program or combination see page 49 Press the RUN button to start playback the button will be lit Press the bu
251. peggiator the button will be unlit If it had been playing it will stop Note The on off status is saved when you write the program Changing the tempo Use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to fae set the tempo of the KROSS 120 TAP The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 4 040 00 300 00 bpm The LED will blink in time with the specified tempo Note The tempo setting is also saved when you write a program Note The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the Resolution PROG gt ARP page or P ARP gt SETUP page Note In the P INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS page you can use the value dial or the cursor buttons to edit the setting Tip You can synchronize the tempo with an external MIDI device see page 99 amp If the KROSS is set to synchronize with an external device you can t adjust the tempo on the KROSS itself Arpeggiator control MOD You can control the duration strength and rhythmic feel of the arpeggiated notes 1 Access the PROG gt ARP page Use the PAGE button or PAGE button to select the page 2 Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the following parameters to edit 3 Use the VALUE dial etc to edit the value 67 68 Arpeggiator function Arpeggiator control GATE VEL SWING i De cin gt TONE gt TIER ARP N PIANO 466 Kross Grand Piano mup GATE 00 AB VEL 00 pS WING 00 oe 6691 Key Piano Arpeggio 1 Octave loct Resolution _ r So
252. peggio will be developed 8 Access the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page ARP PATTERN P SETUP gt EDIT moo A pattern consists of Steps and Tones Step Each user arpeggio pattern has up to 64 steps Starting with the first step the arpeggiator will play notes at intervals of the note value specified by the Resolution The vertical lines of the grid indicate the steps Tone Each step can sound a chord of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 No Length 8 01 05 Step No 9 Enter one or more Tones at each Step Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the Step and press the ENTER button The tone will alternate on off each time you press the button 10 Use Step to select the step then specify the Pitch Pitch Offset Gate Vel Velocity and Flam for each step Please see step 3 of An example of creating a pattern An example of creating a pattern 6h 1 Access the ARP PATTERN gt EDIT page 2 Enter the tones shown in the following illustration CULE ars Cr SETUP gt EDIT roo a ee es eneee 68 Pitch 00 Gate 50x Yel G64 Flam 68 3 When you play the keyboard as shown in the illustration the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of the chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchecked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play 4 For steps 0
253. playback of track 2 will also be muted To cancel muting press the ENTER button again 4 TRACK 02 gt Sound Go Pan C64 Volume 127 23 ee ee 1 2 1S MMHOARRARARRARRRAAAG Turn on Solo for track 1 Press the FUNCTION button select Solo Setting from the menu and press the OK button The Solo Setting dialog box will appear Use the cursor button to select Solo and use the cursor button lt 4 to select Track 01 When you press the ENTER button to add a check mark the screen will indicate S now you ll hear only the playback of track 1 In this way you can play only a specific track that you want to hear If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority Use the cursor button and the ENTER button to turn Solo on for track 2 The indication will change and you ll hear the playback of tracks 1 and 2 MIDI tracks 3 16 will not be heard ESTN 4 TRACK 02b v TT aie res 1 ef A e TE r Exclusive Mode To turn off the Solo feature press the ENTER button once again Turn off Solo for MIDI tracks 1 and 2 The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the Sound settings The SOLO setting is not stored when you save the song Exclusive Solo Exclusive Solo is a function that limits the Solo function described above to a single track at a tim
254. playback or recording Rewind 44 button When the Song is playing or paused this button will rewind the song When you press and hold this button its LED will light up and the playback will rewind Rewind is disabled during recording and while the Song is stopped Fast Forward gt gt button When the Song is playing or paused this button will fast forward the song When you press and hold this button the button will light up and the playback will fast forward Fast forward is disabled during recording and while the Song is stopped Locate 14 button This instantly moves the song playback point to the location you specified By default this will be the first beat of the first measure Select the desired location then hold down the EXIT button and press the LOCATE button You can also specify the location by using a function command REC button Pressing this button will enter record ready mode Once you re in record ready mode shown by the button s light you can begin recording by pressing the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button For details please see Recording MIDI in real time on page 56 By pressing this REC button in Program mode or Combination mode you can instantly access the Auto Song Setup function which lets you start recording immediately see page 55 START STOP gt mg button This button starts or stops recording and playback 17 Tempo This adjusts the tempo for t
255. pplies if MIDI Clock Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being transmitted see page 99 Synchronization via MIDI clock The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the KROSS Step sequencer Performing with the step sequencer The step sequencer is a function that lets you use the front panel buttons 1 16 to easily create drum loop patterns By turning steps on off you can create patterns in an intuitive way and modify a pattern while it plays back The step sequencer can be used in Program Combination or Sequencer mode the loop patterns that you create can be saved together with the sound and song data A loop pattern consists of up to 64 steps and you can add volume accents and a sense of swing to the steps A pattern can use up to 12 different tones such as kick or snare You can edit the number of steps in a pattern and specify the instrumental sounds Inst that will actually be sounded by the tones i 0w on oo BANK Step On Zone A Zone B Tone 12 Tone 3 ee o o ee Tone 2 e o o Tone 1 o o 4 l SENT Tone 13 EEEE N MS ees ao Ea SRS The sounds used by each tone can be selected from the variations of the currently selected drum set You can also exchange the drum set itself Playback and settings in Program mode Playing and stopping the step sequencer 1 Select the program that you ll use when playing the step sequencer or when ent
256. pre specified for the drum kit will be used and therefore will not be shown in the screen A drum kit s velocity zones can be edited in the Global Media mode DRUM KIT page see page 93 Selecting Multisamples Let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two Multisamples using just OSC1 1 Select the P POSC gt MS1 page and turn the multisample 1 Multisample On Off parameter On Switching pages as necessary turn the Multisample On off parameter on for multisample 2 and off for multisamples 3 and 4 Multisample On Off Bank Multisample Select Fit ose S 1 se mss miso vel SC 43 L Octave 8181 Transpose 00 NIULTISAIMPLE 1 __ j 31 32 Playing and editing Programs Select Stereo as the Multisample Bank for multisamplel and multisample2 There are two main types of Multisample Banks Mono and Stereo Note that stereo Multisamples will require twice as many voices as mono Multisamples eee iS 1 Tis Tis atk VEL O0SC 43 1 Octave 018 Transpose 00 pa E 1 SOE C 002 KROSS Piano f T Pgeverne Gi i prutr Level 127 BottomVel 001 Xfade Off _ G Linear Linear Select the multisample Multisamples are organized by category such as piano guitar bell etc Choose the Multisample Select parameter and press the ENTER button to see the list Use the cursor buttons lt gt to switch categories use the cursor buttons V A to select a multisample and press the E
257. press the OK MENU button to save the settings Note The explanation above is the procedure for saving Global settings G SET see Global audio input settings G SET and individual settings 6 Press the DONE MENU button to return to the page you were in prior to the dialog box Connecting a guitar Connect your guitar to the MIC IN jack Please see the Connecting a mic section above Note Most guitars and basses i e equipped with passive pickups that do not have a preamp produce a low output level that cannot be recorded at a satisfactory volume or quality Route such instruments through a preamp or effect unit before connecting them to the KROSS If the output of the preamp or effect unit is too high and you cannot set an appropriate input level adjust the output level of the preamp or effect unit If your instrument has active type pickups with a built in preamp simply connect it directly Connecting an audio player An audio player or other stereo line input source can be connected to the LINE IN jack 1 Turn the VOLUME knob of the KROSS all the way to the left minimizing the volume 2 Make sure that the AUDIO IN button is off unlit 3 Connect your audio player to the LINE IN jack 4 Turn the AUDIO IN button on lit to enable the input Note By default the MIC IN jack input is enabled change the setting to enable the LINE IN jack 5 Hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN butt
258. press the SETUP button A In order to use the audio recorder you ll need a SD card separately sold SETUP button This button opens the audio setup window where you can select a song for the audio recorder and execute functions such as record standby fast forward and rewind Note Use the AUDIO IN button to adjust settings for the external audio input Note If you press this button once again you ll return to the page that had been displayed in the previously selected mode PLAY PAUSE 1 button This is a dedicated button that executes the recorder playback or record and pause functions In any mode this button lets you immediately play or record or pause The state of the light and color of the button indicates the operating status of the recorder Unlit Stopped Lit green Playing Blinking green Playback is paused Lit red Recording Blinking red Recording is paused Blinking orange Recording is paused waiting for Auto input 10 Display Display This shows the parameters and settings of the KROSS as well as a variety of other information Pages Each screen of parameters or information is called a page To edit or adjust the settings of the KROSS yov ll access the page that contains the desired parameter and then change its value Dialog box The screen that appears when you need to perform a command function confirm a result or recall a temporary function is called a dia
259. r 1439 Background what does Amp mean Different sounds have characteristic shapes to their volume levels For example the volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note on the other hand remains constant as long as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume 4 Organ Volume remains constant Volume decays until note is released gradually gt EE Time Time Pan Pan The main Pan parameter controls the stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Normally you ll set this to C064 so that the sound is centered equally between the left and right speakers To create a stereo effect when OSC Oscillator Mode is set to Double set the OSC1 Pan to L001 and the OSC2 Pan R127 This will make OSC1 go to the left speaker and OSC2 go to the right speaker With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on KROSS producing an interesting effect Pan DKIT SET Use DKit Setting Use DKit Setting applies when OSC Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the Program can use a different pan position for each drum sound as sp
260. r buttons lt gt A V EXIT ENTER FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU buttons SEQUENCER P M PAUSE I REW 44 FF DP LOCATE Iq REC START STOP TEMPO TEMPO Knob TAP button Split and layer SPLIT button LAYER button Other AUDIO IN button VOLUME knob Conrolnp t DAMPER Supports piano style half damper pedals as well as standard foot switches ontrol Inputs k ASSIGNABLE SWITCH ASSIGNABLE PEDAL Connectors 1 4 phone jacks TS unbalanced Controllers Value controller User Interface Output Impedance 1 1 kQ stereo 550 Q mono L Mono only 10 0 dBu Load Impedance 10 kQ or greater Audio Outputs Analog Controllable by the VOLUME knob Connectors AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R Maximum Level 1 8 stereo mini phone jack 33 0O 40 40 mW Controllable by the VOLUME knob 1 8 stereo mini phone jack LINE IN Input impedance 1 1 kQ Maximum input level 42 to 0 dBu Audio Inputs Analog 1 4 phone jacks TS unbalanced MIC IN Input impedance 33 0 Maximum input level 48 to 6 dBu MIDI IN OUT 1 USB TYPE B USB MIDI interface B Capacity recognized SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes GB SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes GB SD Card slot SDXC memory cards are not supported Power AC adapter power supply jack DC 9V Power On Off button AA alkaline batteries x 6 or nickel metal hydride batteries x 6 AA alkaline batteries x 6 Approximately 4 hours AA nickel metal hydride
261. r clear the check box You can enable or disable a parameter or function by selecting or clearing the check box The parameter or function is enabled if the check box is selected and disabled if it is cleared h Check box r EEE lt gt gt v EER i Category select icon For parameters indicated by this icon you can use the CATEGORY dial or the SELECT dial to select the category or number j Scroll Use this to see parameter values that cannot be shown in a single screen Additional parameters exist in the direction of the black indicator P PITCH EG E Reset AM TIME CURVE Attack 66 L j Scroll even 66 L Slope EA L k Function list The function list will appear when you press the FUNCTION button The functions that are shown will depend on the page that s selected The functions shown on the bottom of the dialog box are assigned to the four buttons see page 3 k Function list FUNCIONS Write Program Solo Setting r Compare Auto Song Setup CLOSE a Y OK I Function dialog box When you select a function you ll see a dialog box where you can adjust the settings that are needed to execute the command The dialog box that appears will depend on the command that you selected Some commands such as Solo Setting do not display a dialog box I Function dialog box Text edit icon WRITE COMBINA ON PIANO 666 Piano amp Strings 1 riOwrite EERE Piano WRITE
262. r input for a certain length of time With the factory settings this is set to four hours Using the VOLUME knob is not considered to be user input A When the power turns off the settings you had been editing will be lost If you want to keep the edited settings you must save them first Changing the auto power off setting If you want to change the setting so that the power will not turn off automatically proceed as follows to disable the auto power off function 1 Press the GLOBAL MEDIA button to access the GLOBAL page If it does not appear press the EXIT button Auto power off function 2 Press the PAGE or PAGE button to access the GLOBAL gt PREF Preferences page 3 Use the cursor V A buttons to select the Auto Power Off parameter GLOBAL Bank Map Auto Power Off Battery Type LCD Contrast Auto Rec Start 7 GASIC SYSTEM PREF 4 Use the value dial to specify the time until the power will turn of If you don t want the auto power off function to turn off the power automatically set this to Disabled 5 Save the setting Press the FUNCTION button to access the function list Choose Write Global Setting If a different function is selected press the PAGE button to select it Write Global Setting Load Preload Demo Data Change all bank references Half Damper Calibration Press the OK MENU button A confirmation message will appear press the OK MENU button
263. ram can use one arpeggiator You can select an arpeggio pattern specify the range that the pattern will be developed within and specify the range of notes or velocities that will trigger the arpeggiator Drum Track and step sequencer While the arpeggiator plays the main program separate drum programs are provided for the Drum Track and the step sequencer The Drum Track lets you select a drum program and pattern and specify how it will be triggered The step sequencer lets you select the instrument that the drum program will use and lets you specify a pattern by using buttons 1 16 Common LFO OSC1 LFO1 OSC1 LFO2 YY OSCI Basic _ filter 4 8 AA Filter Mod Filter LFO Mod Filter EG Amp Mod OSC1 Pitch Pitch EG lt a Oscillator Pitch 4 Filter _ Amplifier Master Effect Routing 12 Insert OUTPUT sci 2 Effect L MONO R tas Insert Effects Master Effects FX Control Bus 24 fects _ _ _____ __ gt gt 29 30 Playing and editing Programs An overview of the edit pages In order to do detailed editing you ll need to access the edit pages in the display The preceding section Easy program editing on page 27 explained how to us
264. rameter and press the ENTER button to add a check mark If a check mark is shown the specified region of measures will loop during playback or recording 4 Turn on Play Intro Use the cursor button W to select the parameter and press the ENTER button to add a check mark If a check mark is shown playback will start from the first measure of the intro and then the specified region of measures will repeat 5 Set the Loop Start to M005 and the Loop End to M008 Use the cursor button Y to select each parameter and use the value dial to specify the value 6 Using the procedure described above make settings for track 10 as shown in the illustration below Track Select 10 Track Play Loop On Play Intro Off ee 4 TRACK 10b Y Track Play oop r Play Intro L Start M G9 oop Star M009 L End 11 221 1S a oe fi A A Loop Start M009 Loop End M010 If you play back from the first measure with the settings shown in the screenshot above the specified region of measures will repeat as follows Measures 1 2 3 4 5 61 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Trak 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Track10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 If Play Intro is unchecked the specified region of measures will repeat as follows Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Trak 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5
265. rd choose SPLIT if you want the two sounds to play separately in the high and regions of the keyboard Note A layer or split sound that you create can be saved as a combination Tip If you want to make more sophisticated settings in order to obtain more complex sounds use Combination mode LAYER button When you press the LAYER button the QUICK LAYER dialog box will appear By default the program that s currently selected will be a program in the strings category Select a program to layer and adjust the volume and octave settings By pressing the WRITE MENU button you can save the settings to a user combination bank see page 25 SPLIT button When you press the SPLIT button the QUICK SPLIT dialog box will appear By default the currently selected program will be assigned to the high range and a program of the bass category will be assigned to the low range Select the split program swap the high and low programs if desired and adjust settings such as the split point volume and octave By pressing the WRITE MENU button you can save the settings to a user combination bank see page 26 7 Master effects on off MASTER FX button This button turns the master effect on off When the button is on LED lit the master effect 1 and 2 settings of the program combination or song will be enabled When the button is off LED unlit the corresponding master effect 1 and 2 will be off The on off status of these b
266. rd slot please see Using an SD card on page 21 How to save data Access the MEDIA gt FILE page and use a function command to select the data that will be saved on the SD card As an example here we ll execute Save All to save the PCG and SNG files Save All saves all internal memory Programs Combinations Global settings Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns to media as a PCG file It also saves songs as a SNG file This method is available only if the current directory is a DOS directory Press the cursor button lt to move between levels 1 Make sure that the SD card is in a state that allows saving see Inserting removing an SD card on page 21 2 Access the MEDIA gt FILE page Hold down the EXIT button and press the GLOBAL MEDIA button Note If the contents of another file are shown press the cursor button lt 3 Press the FUNCTION button to access the menu use the A PAGE or V PAGE buttons to select Save All and then press the OK MENU button A dialog box will appear f SAVE ALL PCG AND SNG OS To FFAJINE WFILE PCG SNG CANCEL 4 Press the text edit button and input a filename for the file you want to save see Editing names 5 Press the OK MENU button to execute the save function The data will be saved on the SD card and you will return to the Save page The display will show the file that was saved The various types of data are save
267. record using the following method if you want to overdub an external input such as a guitar solo or chorus onto a portion of the audio song 1 Set Auto Auto Rec Start to Input Low or Input High Make input settings for Mic In 2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER gt II button to start playback AUDIO RECORDER button lit green 3 Slightly earlier than the point where you want to start overdubbing press the Rec Control Ik MENU button to enter the record standby condition AUDIO RECORDER button blinking orange 4 Sing the chorus part Recording will start automatically in response to the input When you overdub using this method the audio input from 0 2 seconds earlier than the moment you started recording will actually be recorded This lets you overdub without losing the beginning of the chorus or guitar phrase Tip This Auto Auto Rec Start setting can be stored in the GLOBAL gt PREF page as the default setting Loop playback There s a loop playback function that lets you repeatedly play a specified region A B of an audio song Note The loop play on off setting and the specified time are saved individually for each audio song amp This setting will be saved to the SD card when you switch to a different audio song or when you turn off the power If you remove the SD card immediately after select the setting the setting will not be saved Using loop play TSS Free ahism i oo7 Mommo mM TRG ner
268. rs Splits and Layers Let s create a Combination that combines both splits and layers like the diagram below Timbre 1 Piano Timbre 2 Brass Timbre 3 Strings IAAL C 1 B3 C4 G9 1 Access the COMBI gt PROG page 2 Select a piano sound for Timbre 1 a brass sound for Timbre 2 and a string sound for Timbre 3 USER 000 InitCombi 4TIMBRE 03 Status E INT STRINGS 466 E TEER SE irs ee ee 7 a E a a a 1 m 2am amam SmE Parada SSS Par Pa i P i en en on a ED 3 For timbres 1 3 set Status to INT USER 686 E InitCombi 4TIMBRE 03 Status b STRINGS 466 Legato Strings eel 9 9 ee ee a ed 2 dS lE KE XE LSE XEY XE ed Ta E XE XE RAY XEY XA XES CXS a TT 4 Access the C TIMBRE MIDI page 5 For timbres 1 3 set the MIDI Channel to Gch Global channel C TIMBRE mab OSG PITH SCaLES 4TIMBRE 03 gt MIDI Channel Bank Select MSB CA When EX2 Bink Select LSB 000 a S 69 ee a ee 2 9 1 5 l 5 GehGehGeh 4 5 6 7 amp 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 Access the C ZONE DELAY gt KEY ZONE page 7 For timbre 1 set Top Key to G9 and Bottom Key to C4 TIMBRE O 1 Top Key Top Slope Bottom Slope Bottom Key OO bed bed oa ed bog Ta You can also enter a note value by moving the cursor to the parameter in the display then holding down the ENTER button and pressing a n
269. rt v Key Sync v Latch v Keyboard Operation settings Arpeggio Pattern Select Changing the length of the arpeggiated notes e Select GATE and adjust the value to change the length of the arpeggiated notes ce s Negative values make the notes shorter and positive values lengthen them If this is 00 the note length will be as specified by the program parameter Gate P ARP gt SETUP page Note It is effective to adjust the Release on the PROG gt TONE page Changing the strength of the arpeggiated notes e Select VEL Velocity and adjust the value to change the strength of the arpeggiated notes 6699 Negative values make the notes weaker and positive values strengthen them If this is 00 the strength of the notes will be as specified by the program parameter Velocity P ARP gt SETUP page Note It is effective to adjust Cutoff Resonance and EG Intensity in the PROG gt TONE page Giving a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern e Select SWING and adjust the value to shift the timing of even numbered arpeggiated notes forward or backward in time t 9 Negative settings will make the even numbered notes earlier positive settings will make them later If this is at the center position 12 o clock the setting will be as specified by the program parameter Swing P ARP gt SETUP page Note Swing has no effect on the preset patterns Arpeggio pattern selection and opera
270. s and save them Please see steps 6 and 7 of Quick Layer on page 25 Combination settings made by Quick Layer Split When you use the Quick Layer or Quick Split function the effects Drum Track and step sequencer will be assigned to the combination as follows The program that had been selected prior to pressing the LAYER or SPLIT button Program copied to T01 Drum Track copied to T10 Step sequencer copied to T16 Arpeggiator copied to Arp A IFX1 IFX2 IFX5 copied to IFX1 IFX2 and IFX5 However depending on the effect types and routing settings some effects will not be copied MFX1 MFX2 copied to MFX1 and MFX2 The program that was subsequently selected for layer split Program copied to T02 Drum Track not copied Step sequencer not copied Arpeggiator if Use ARP is selected copied to Arp B IFX1 IFX2 copied to IFX3 and IFX4 However depending on the effect types and routing settings some effects will not be copied MFX1 MFX2 not copied Easy program editing Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions Easy program editing Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions The fastest way to create the sound you need is to find a preload program that s close to what you want and then modify its settings to your taste On the PROG gt TONE page you can edit the sound s most important parameters such as cutoff frequency resonance attack time and release time 1 Access
271. s A Y to select the sound parameter that you want to edit 4 Use the VALUE dial etc to edit the value For details on these parameters please see page 27 Saving a Combination you ve edited After you ve edited a combination you must save it if you want to keep the changes you ve made If you re select the combination or turn off the power before saving your edits will be lost For details please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 103 You can also save combinations on an SD card as PCG files For more details please see Saving to SD card on page 106 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches Within a Combination you can use note range and the velocity level to define the zone where a specific timbre will play The Programs assigned to each Timbre can be played in three ways as part of a layer a split or a velocity switch A Combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods simultaneously Tip In Program mode it s easy to make layer or split settings for two programs see Quick Layer Split function on page 25 Layer Layers cause two or more Programs to play simultaneously when a note is played Ht Split Program A Program B Layer Two or more programs sound simultaneously Splits cause different Programs to respond on different areas of the keyboard
272. same way as a program see page 63 Dynamic modulation Dmod for the master effects and total effect can be controlled on the MIDI channel specified by Ctrl Ch Effect settings for audio input You can apply the effects of the KROSS to the external audio input from the LINE IN jack or the MIC IN jack and record the processed sound on the audio recorder You can also apply effects to the mic input or line input along with the program or combination you re playing In addition you can use a vocoder effect D09 Vocoder that uses the external mic input to control an internal sound Normally the settings of the Global mode G INPUT gt AUDIO IN page are shared For special cases such as when you want to have specific settings for a vocal mic you can adjust individual settings for a program combination or MIDI sequencer song Routing 1 Hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN button The AUDIO IN QUICK SETTING dialog box will appear see Global audio input settings G SET and individual settings on page 19 EEE QUE Saris G SET Select O Line Mic Pan C064 o L etc R Level Play Gain 37 Bus Q L R Send1 00G Send2 040 FX Control Bus R Off In the Select area specify the input jack that you want to enable Set the appropriate Level and Gain settings see Connecting your input devices on page 18 A The input gain Gain setting will be s
273. see page 67 The Drum Track is a function that plays drum patterns in a variety of styles For more about the Drum Track please see page 77 The step sequencer is a function that lets you create and play drum patterns in a way that s similar to the Drum Track While the Drum Track lets you select preset patterns the step sequencer lets you create patterns from scratch You can create and play drum patterns by turning on off buttons 1 16 which are located to the right side of the front panel For more about the step sequencer please see page 81 The Drum Track and the step sequencer each produce sound using a drum program that is separate from the program that you play on the keyboard You can play a program along with an accompaniment provided by the Drum Track and the step sequencer Arpeggiated phrases the Drum Track and the step sequencer pattern can all be synchronized and you can also play along with them Quick Layer Split function Quick Layer Quick Layer Split function Quick Layer is a function that makes it easy to set up a layer letting you play two sounds that are layered together You can also adjust the volume balance Quick Split is a function that lets you make split settings so that you can play different sounds on the left and right regions of the keyboard You can select each of the two programs and adjust their volume and octave Note The sound you create will be saved as a combination Note
274. settings will make it have a deeper effect Since the filter EG operates relative to the filter cutoff frequency the tonal change produced by the filter will be affected both by Cutoff and by EG Intensity Level Time v Vel Intensity Adjusts the velocity intensity for the amp level With a setting of 99 velocity will no longer produce any change at all A setting of 99 will produce maximum change in the same direction positive or negative as for the original program EG Adjust controls Note With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program parameters will be unchanged Attack Adjusts the EG attack times of the filter and amp simultaneously This sets the time from note on until the attack level is reached Increasingly negative values settings will shorten the attack time and increasingly positive values settings will lengthen it Level note on note off ead ected ET Sustain i Level eT b ol 0 bei Time T 1 l a Release Time Time Time Decay Adjusts the EG decay times of the filter and amp simultaneously This sets the time from when the attack level is reached until the break level is reached Increasingly negative values settings will shorten the decay time and increasingly positive values settings will lengthen it Sustain Adjusts the EG sustain level that follows the decay slope time for both the filter and amp simultaneously
275. sible for feedback to occur If this occurs adjust the input output levels and the effect settings Take special care when using high gain effects Audio recorder The audio recorder can record the sound as it is processed by the effects specified in Program Combination or Sequencer mode he You can t apply effects to the playback of the audio recorder REC Audio Recorder PLAY Master Return Qscillatort H Filter gt HAmplifiert Effect 1 2 Insert OUTPUT Effect 1 5 L MONO R gt Qscillator2 C Filter2 Amplifier2 Line In stereo Mic In mono Routing and effect settings Routing lets you specify how each sound will be connected to the various effects In each mode you can adjust settings for the program s oscillators the combination s timbres and the song s tracks Here we ll explain how to adjust routing settings in each mode and how to edit the effect settings Effect settings for a program Routing 1 Access the P FX ROUTING gt BUS page P FxX ROUTING DRUMTRACK STEPSEGQ Bus 2 GRR FX Control Bus G off 2 Bus Bus Select specifies the bus where the output from the oscillators will be sent Here we ll choose IFX1 so that the output of the oscillators will be sent to insert effect 1 L R The oscillator output will not be sent to an insert effect It will pass through the total effect and then be s
276. sing controllers to modify the sound In addition to using the keyboard the KROSS lets you control the sound by using the pitch bend wheel modulation wheel SW1 and SW2 buttons damper pedal and foot switch or foot pedal These controls let you modify the tone pitch volume effects etc in realtime as you play Pitch bend wheel modulation wheel SW1 SW2 buttons p l e Damper pedal foot switch pedal p 20 e TEMPO knob TAP button p 5 Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer Based on the note data it receives from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator can generate a wide range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns A combination lets you use two arpeggiators For more about the arpeggiator please see page 67 The Drum Track plays a variety of drum patterns using the drum program that you ve assigned to the desired timbre For more about the Drum Track please see page 77 The step sequencer is a function that lets you create and play drum patterns in a way that s similar to the Drum Track You can create and play drum patterns by turning on off buttons 1 16 located on the right side of the front panel For more about the step sequencer please see page 81 The step sequencer is assigned to timbre 16 You can play a combination along with an accompaniment provided by the Drum Track and the
277. sound N Program 5 Split Point C4 Volume Octave r Use ARP Lower Upper 4 Lower CANCEL 3 Select the other program bass that will be split with the program you selected in step 2 then specify its volume and pitch e Program Select the other program If you used the CATEGORY dial and the SELECT dial press the MENU button to close the list Default setting category BASS index number 000 e Split Point Specify the point at which the two programs will be divided When you play the keyboard you ll hear the bass in the lower region and the piano in the upper region including C4 Default setting C4 Note You can use the keyboard to specify the split point Select this parameter and press the ENTER button so that the A V symbols are shown beside the value Press a key on the keyboard to enter the note number Press the ENTER button once again to confirm the setting e Lower Upper If you select this parameter and press the ENTER button the two sounds will be exchanged Default setting Lower e Volume e Octave e Use ARP Please see step 4 of the Quick Layer section on page 25 Note You can t change the settings of the first program Note The next time you open this dialog box the last specified settings will be selected as the default 4 When you ve finished adjusting settings press the WRITE MENU button to open the dialog box adjust the appropriate setting
278. spose 00 Tune 50 i 3 On the top line of the display use Drum Kit Select to select the drum kit that you want to edit amp h GM drum kits 48 GM 56 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 48 GM 56 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit function to copy it to 00 INT 47 USER and then edit the copy 4 Use the Key parameter to select the note that you wish to edit To select a key you can use any of the standard VALUE dial etc If you select KEY and press the ENTER button you ll be able to use the keyboard to specify the note number Press the ENTER button once again to confirm 5 Use the Assign check box to specify whether the key will have its own settings or use the same settings as the next higher note If Assign is checked the key will have its own settings This is the default If Assign is not checked the key won t have its own settings Instead it will use the same settings as the next higher note except that the drumsamples will be played at a lower pitch The amount of pitch change depends on the Pitch Slope parameter on the P PITCH gt BASIC page Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds Tip If you want to copy the settings of one key to a different drum sample use the Copy Key Setup function 94 Velocity crossfade settings For this
279. step sequencer Arpeggiated phrases the Drum Track and the step sequencer pattern can all be synchronized and you can also play along with them Editing acombination Summary of the edit pages e e e e 5 Editing a combination Za ee CE 1 You can edit any of the Combinations that were shipped with C FILTER 2 MIDI transmit receive filter settings for the KROSS You can create your own combinations by 3 each timbre editing a preloaded combination or by starting from an 4 initialized combination ASSIGN Arpeggiator assignments to each ae timb A combination has sixteen timbres you can assign a diliat program to each timbre and specify its volume and pan the CARR A Arp ggiator i settings key range where the program will sound and how its sound B Arp ggiator p ae will be routed to the effects You can create simple setups SCAN ZONE _ Arpeggiator trigger region settings such as detuned sounds split or layers or highly complex PATTERN a Track AH selection and C DRUM rigger region settings orchestra like setups j KO I TRACK CHANNEL Drum Track input output MIDI channel Note If a program you edit in Combination mode is used in settings Program mode that program will sound according to its Step sequencer program selection and edited state BASIE length settings C STEP EDIT Step on off entry
280. t Select an effect other than 000 No Effect for IFX1 5 or MFX 1 2 Are the Effect SW IFX and MFX check boxes GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page selected p 98 If you are in Combination and Sequencer mode and master effects are not audible when you raise the Send1 or Send2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised PG p 93 135 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered PG p 91 132 Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track Have you routed the output to an insert effect p 62 64 and PG p 200 The program selected for a timbre track in Combination or Sequencer mode sounds different than when played in Program mode When you select a program for a timbre track in Combination or Sequencer mode the arpeggiator and effect settings from Program mode are not automatically applied e You can use the Copy From Program Copy Insert Effect or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these settings from Program mode PG p 139 151 151 Step sequencer When a favorite is selected you can t save step sequencer settings This is normal Make and save these settings in Program or Combination mode Audio recorder Can
281. t amp Kross Grand Piano program via MIDI S 1 Octave Down SwW2 Octave Up Note Depending on the bank there are limitations on where a program can be saved For details please see Bank numbers and conditions for saving on page 102 Category icon SW control information Bank USER icon Program name Tip In the PROG gt MAIN page you can also select programs by using the cursor buttons Up Down or the value dial Category and index number Category Index number bank number Type of sounds 2 Turn the CATEGORY dial to select the category of 000 A000 043 A043 PIANO Acoustic piano program that you want to play 044 G001 053 g2 001 The sound select list will appear 000 A044 044 A088 i i pp E PIANO 045 G005 059 94 006 E P clavi harpsichord AEA 000 A089 046 B007 l 4 m o R amp B E Piano SW177 ORGAN 047 G017 062 g3 017 Orga accordion cenena EPianoPreamp T e 000 B008 034 B042 pell mallet 002 E P Distortion Sw2 035 G010 049 g2 015 003 E Piano 1984 000 B043 051 B094 664 Classic Bell E P STRINGS 052 G041 076 g2 049 Strings vocal Tip The sound select list will also appear when you press BRASS oe eee ae Brass woodwind reed the ENTER button CATEGORY PROG A ENTER GAEL F 7 e R amp B E Piano SW1 rene 501 E Piano Preamp 962 E P Distortion Sw2 003 E Piano 1984 904 Classic Bell E P
282. t Pedal and is that pedal volume lowered p 21 Could the program be muted p 28 Ifa specific timbre does not sound in Combination mode is the Sound setting set to Play p 44 Are all of the Solo settings turned off p 44 If a specific track does not sound in Sequencer mode is the Sound setting set to Play Are all of the Sound settings turned off p 53 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH p 47 54 Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play PG p 8 79 118 o Are the Oscillator Drum Track Timbre or Track levels lowered in the control surface mixer p 28 44 53 Could the total polyphony be exceeding the maximum polyphony of 120 voices p 31 Notes do not stop Is Hold P BASIC gt NOTE ON page turned off PG p 9 In G INPUT CTRL gt FOOT make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly p 20 If the DRUM TRACK or ARP buttons are turned on try turning them off Notes are sounded in duplicate Is Local Control turned Off Clear the Local Control On checkbox G MIDI gt BASIC p 99 Noise or oscillation is heard When you re applying an effect to an external audio input signal from the MIC IN jack or LINE in jack unwanted oscillation feedback may occur depending on the type
283. t record Is the SD card inserted correctly p 21 Could LOOP be turned on You can t record if LOOP is on The volume of imported data is too loud compared to the sound played by the KROSS or the external audio input Ifthe data is very loud there may be a substantial volume difference To temporarily adjust the playback volume of the audio recorder use the Set Play Level function If you want to overdub onto the imported audio use the Adjust Audio Level function instead of Set Play Level to lower the volume of the entire audio song beforehand p 91 When you overdub the previous take becomes too quiet Could Set Play Level be set to something other than 0 dB Use the Adjust Audio Level function to adjust the volume of the entire audio song gt p 91 113 114 Appendices Could Master Volume be assigned to Foot Pedal and could that pedal be lowered If you want to adjust the volume of the performance while you record use Expression or Volume p 21 MIDI The KROSS does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly p 22 Are the KROSS s receive settings such as the global MIDI channel and the timbre track s receive channel set to match the channels of the transmitting device PG p 299 The KROSS does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data o Are the G MIDI gt FILTER s
284. t you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases and guitar or keyboard backing riffs It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of the sound design process when creating subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects The KROSS s Dual Arpeggiator feature lets you use two simultaneous arpeggio patterns in Combination mode and Sequencer mode You can take advantage of this in many ways including a separate arpeggio pattern for a drum program and another applied to a bass program or using a keyboard split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns The KROSS provides five preset arpeggio patterns the standard UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM You can also create and store 1 028 of your own user patterns The factory settings contain a wide variety of arpeggio patterns stored in these user locations see page 72 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode Playing and stopping the arpeggiator 1 Press the PROG button to enter Program mode and select a program For details please see Selecting Programs on page 23 PROG MAIN X IONE STIUXERS GRP S sss PIANO 908 Agaa J 120 00 g Kross Grand Piano Sw Octave Down SW2 Octave Up Press ARP button the LED will light up ARP to turn on the arpeggiator When you play the keyboard the selected arpeggio pattern will start playing Press the ARP button once again to turn off the ar
285. tailed Editing with Programs Using Filters Resonance Resonance emphasizes the frequencies around the cutoff frequency as shown in the diagram below When this is set to 0 there is no emphasis and frequencies beyond the cutoff will simply diminish smoothly At medium settings the resonance will alter the timbre of the filter making it sound more nasal or more extreme At very high settings the resonance can be heard as a separate whistling pitch To make the resonance track the keyboard pitch please see Key Follow on page 27 of the Parameter Guide 24 24 12 12 CE B 12 12 24 24 3 be 24 168 tk 10k 2 k Pho 24 168 tk 10k __ 24k Low resonance lt gt High resonance iis 24 160 1k 1k 2 k ho 24 160 tie 10k 24k Modulating the filters You can modulate the filter cutoff frequency using the Filter EG the LFOs keyboard tracking and other built in and MIDI controllers This is a great way to add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Filter EG The Filter EG is a multi stage envelope which you can use to modulate the filter as well as other Program parameters The EG itself is set up on the P FILTER EG gt ENVELOPE page the way that it affects the filters is controlled by the parameters described below on the P FILTER gt EG I Intensity page OSC 44 1 FILTER EG INTENSITY Velocity to D 40 A 00 Intensity to D GEE Filter EG AMS G Kn
286. tains musical data Meaning The export source audio song does not contain data e Specify an audio song that has been recorded Source timbre is not available Meaning When executing the Copy Step Seq function the selected copy source is a combination or song whose STEP check box is not selected In this case the step sequencer s pattern settings etc will be copied but the program settings of timbre 16 track 16 will not be copied e Select the STEP check box of the copy source combination or song System warning The internal memory has been corrupted likely due to an interruption of power while the system was writing saving data This has been repaired and the affected Bank has been initialized Meaning A memory write procedure did not end normally perhaps because the power was turned off while processing was still underway after you wrote a program or other data into internal memory The KROSS will automatically initialize itself in order to repair the internal memory This message will appear at this time press OK to close the dialog box In some cases the preload bank data may be temporarily initialized As necessary use the Global mode Load Preload Demo Data command to load the preload data into internal memory or if you have your own backup PCG load it using Media mode 117 118 Appendices T There is no readable data Meaning Either the file size is 0 or the file does not conta
287. tep sequencer Specific sounds such as kick snare and tom are already assigned to the 12 tones used by the step sequencer Kick H H Open Tone 9 Snare 1 Snare 2 H H Close Tone 8 Note If you hold down the SETUP button the currently selected tone number will light up If you press this button the ASSIGN INST TO TONE dialog box will appear In this dialog box you can change the sound that s assigned to the tone Please see the following section 5 Press buttons 1 16 to enter steps for the next tone Changing the drum sounds Switching the sounds of all tones switching the drum set Here s how to change the drum sounds 1 Access the P STEP SEQ gt BASIC page P STEP SEQ BASIC XEDIT INST lt MoOON TAX Program 666 Basic Kit 1 J 987 60 Reso Lath 16 Step Bt ooo x1 2 Select Program and use the VALUE dial etc to change the drum program Changing the sounds instruments for each tone Variations are provided for the sounds that are played by each tone 1 While you hold down the SETUP button the currently selected TONE 1 12 buttons will light up To specify an instrument select the button for the TONE that you want to specify making that button light up then press the lit button to access the ASSIGN INST TO TONE dialog box Note Tone 13 is the accent tone You cannot assign an instrument to it Tip You can also access this dialog box by using the Assi
288. the arpeggiator that s currently running the step sequencer or the song that s currently playing Trigger Syne Off If the Trigger Mode setting is set to Start Immediately the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you press the DRUM TRACK button If this is set to Wait KBD Trigger the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you play the keyboard The Drum Track will not synchronize with the arpeggiator that s currently running the step sequencer or the song that s currently running Trigger Sync on The Drum Track will be triggered at one measure intervals in synchronization with the song that s currently running The Drum Track will be triggered at one beat intervals in synchronization with the arpeggiator that s currently running or the step sequencer in Sequencer mode if the song is stopped Note If you want to synchronize the arpeggiator to the Drum Track function that s currently running make settings for Key Sync P ARP gt SETUP C ARP gt A B S ARP gt A B Synchronization with song stop Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt HM button the Drum Track function will stop as well as the sequencer Ifyou want the Drum Track function to start simultaneously with the start of recording press the DRUM TRACK button during the pre count before recording if Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately or play the keyboard
289. the gt II button Tip To return to the beginning of the audio song press the 1 16 button that s assigned to the song you want to play once again If you want to recall a sound on an external MIDI device adjust the appropriate Favorites Mode Select settings Choose Internal if you want to play one of the KROSS internal sound generator s sounds When you register a sound from the front panel that favorite is automatically specified as Internal When you recall a favorite that s specified as Internal the program change that s assigned to that favorite will be transmitted E g A 3 002 B 1 016 Choose the External MIDI setting if you want to recall a sound on an external MIDI device The internal sound generator will be disabled and will not produce sound Note If you want to simultaneously switch and play sounds on the internal sound generator as well as an external MIDI sound module use a combination with the EXT or EX2 settings see page 71 of the Parameter Guide Saving your Favorites When you ve finished registering sounds to buttons save your Favorites settings If you turn off the power without saving your settings they will be lost 1 Press the FAVORITES button to turn on the Favorites function FUNG HIONS Write Favorites Edit Favorite Copy Favorite Insert Favorite FUNCTION PAGE PAGE MENU 2 Press the FUNCTION button use the A PAGE button to select the Write Favorites f
290. the ARP button to turn on the arpeggiator the button will light up Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARP button to turn it on However if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked and if Arpeggiator Assign is set to off then the arpeggiator will not function 3 Select the ARP PATTERN gt SETUP page 4 If you moved from Combination mode press the ENTER button at Arpeggio Select A or B to specify the arpeggiator that you want to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B 5 Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you want to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode access the COMBI gt ARP page and turn Arpeggiator Run off 6 To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the Rename Arpeggio Pattern function see page 178 of the Parameter Guide 7 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost 8 If you wish to save the state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination see
291. the power the Sequencer mode settings and the recorded songs data will be lost 1 Insert an SD card in the SD card slot With the card label facing upward insert the connector end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until you hear a click Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you insert it Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage the slot or the card and the data may be lost 2 Hold down the EXIT button and press the GLOBAL MEDIA button The MEDIA gt FILE page will appear 3 Press the FUNCTION button Press the PAGE or PAGE buttons to choose Save All 4 Press the OK MENU button The Save All PCG and SNG dialog box will appear If you want to change the name you can do so see page 105 5 Press the OK MENU button to save write the data If data of the same name already exists a message will ask whether you want to overwrite the existing data If you want to overwrite the existing data press the OK MENU button Saving a template song If there are sounds or settings that you use frequently for songs it s convenient to save them as a template song Use the Save Template Song function to do this Note The saved data will contain settings for the programs that are selected for the song as well as the track parameters effect settings and arpeggiator settings An overview of the KROSS s effects You can choose from 134 different types of high quality digital eff
292. tion doesn t record via arpeggiator as it did when you were playing it in Combination mode Is Multi REC SEQ gt MAIN checked p 57 and PG p 109 Are the settings in the Copy from Combination dialog box correct PG p 138 Inthe Copy from Combination dialog box check the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option before you execute the copy This will cause the settings to be adjusted automatically Can t record Tone Adjust data Changes you make using Tone Adjust are recorded as system exclusive data Did you check the G MIDI gt FILTER Enable Exclusive check box PG p 163 SMF you loaded in Media mode won t play correctly o Execute the GM Initialize function to restore the settings gt PG p 141 Set Bank Map to GM 2 and load the data again PG p 158 Troubleshooting Arpeggiator Arpeggiator The Arpeggiator does not start Is the ARP button turned on lit p 67 If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or song make sure that Run is checked and that an arpeggiator is selected for Assign p 70 If the arpeggiator does not run in the ARP PATTERN gt SETUP MODE pages could you have moved from Combination or Sequencer mode with settings that keep the arpeggiator from starting Is the MIDI Clock G MIDI gt BASIC parameter set to Internal p 99 In the GLOBAL gt SYSTEM page is ARP SS DT All Off checked p 98
293. tion settings In the PROG gt ARP page you can select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the arpeggiator will function 1 Access the PROG gt ARP page 2 Use the cursor buttons lt gt A Y to select the following parameters to edit 3 Use the VALUE dial etc to edit the value Press the ENTER button to switch the setting of the check box Selecting an arpeggio pattern Inthe Arpeggio Pattern Select area select an arpeggio pattern Preset UP Preset Choose an arpeggio pattern from RANDOM or 0000 1027 With the factory settings a variety of arpeggio patterns are provided in the range 0000 0915 Preset UP Preset DOWN DOWN Preset ALT1 et ALT1 e y e e e oe e e e Preset RANDOM eos RANDOM e J os oe oe Playing arpeggios across multiple octaves e Use the Octave setting to specify the range of 14 octaves in which the arpeggio will be generated sT Octave d mar e el Changing the note value of the arpeggiated notes The Resolution parameter lets you set the note value of the arpeggiated notes over a range from di Using the arpeggiator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode Sounding an
294. to access each page please see Basic operations on page 11 he The settings that you edit in the GLOBAL DRUM KIT pages of Global Media mode are preserved until you turn off the power but will return to their previous settings when you turn off the power If you want to keep these settings you must write them into memory You can also save them on an SD card see pages 104 106 amp The Compare function that lets you return to the state prior to your editing or undo edits is not available in Global Media mode Global settings Basic settings for the KROSS In the GLOBAL gt BASIC SYSTEM and PREF pages you can adjust basic settings for the KROSS itself Velocity curve settings Tuning and transpose settings Master Tune EEA 440 00Hz Key Transpose 00 Velocity Curve 4 Normal MIDI After Touch Curve 3 Normal amp Tuning to another instrument To adjust the tuning in fine increments in order to match other instruments or recorded music The GLOBAL gt BASIC page Master Tune setting adjusts the pitch of the KROSS The Master Tune function is adjustable over a range of 50 cents one semitone 100 cents When Master Tune is at 0 middle A is tuned to 440 Hz Transposing the keyboard The pitch of the KROSS can be transposed in semitone steps This is convenient when you want to change the key of the song without changing your fingering on the keyboard When playing the KROSS
295. ton on will cause arpeggiator A to run for timbre 1 and arpeggiator B to run for timbres 2 and 3 When the ARP button is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres ARP Assign status are set to Off or if Run Arpeggiator Run is unchecked the arpeggiator will not function C ARP PessiGn gt A XE lt SCaN ZONES f G 8757 Or Let s sdoct sf Run E r Sort Gate Step v Latch Velocity Step F Key Syne Swing 866 r Keyboard 3 6 8167 Bs Subtle Riff doct sf Run E v Sort Gate Step v Latch Velocity Step v Key Sync Swing 866 r Keyboard On the C ARP gt A B pages set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program see page 68 Inthe Scan Zone A B page specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will function The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program You can use keyboard ranges or velocity ranges to use one or both of the arpeggiators or to switch between arpeggiators A and B By using the C ZONE DELAY gt KEY ZON and VEL ZONE page to set keyboard and velocity ranges in conjunction with each other you can create even more variations Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations 9 If you wish to save the edited combination settings in internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and write the combination see pages 98 103 10 The St
296. tor will start its pattern as soon as recording begins and will be recorded Synchronization with external sequencer playback If J Tempo is EXT i e if G MIDI gt BASIC MIDI Clock is External MIDI or External USB in Program Combination or Sequencer modes the arpeggiator will synchronize to the MIDI timing Clock and Start messages received from a connected MIDI device Note Synchronization will occur in the same way if the MIDI timing Clock is set to Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being received from a connected MIDI device Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo timing of the external MIDI timing clock Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages If the arpeggiator is turned on and running an incoming MIDI realtime Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of its pattern This is unaffected by the Key Sync setting Drum Track function Performing with the Drum Track function The Drum Track function makes it easy to play the KROSS s high quality drum programs using a wide variety of Drum Track patterns It provides a convenient way for you to hear Drum Track patterns while you try out various phrases on a program or combination or work out the outline of your song Then when you ve come up with some ideas you can use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start recording in Sequencer mode You can
297. ttern consists of four zones A D each zone containing 16 steps that correspond to the 16 buttons The number of steps in the pattern is specified by the Lgth Length setting on the P STEP SEQ gt BASIC page 1 Access the P STEP SEQ gt BASIC page BASIC XEQITXINSTXMAR XMI J 087 00 Reso f_ Lath EA Step Bt X2 P STEP SEQ Program G 000 Basic Kit 1 jo ooo 2 Use the Lgth Length setting to specify the number of steps The pattern will play as a loop for the specified number of steps The tempo and Reso Resolution settings determine the speed Use the BANK button to switch between zones for the specified Lgth For example if Lgth is 32 two zones will be available pressing the BANK button will switch between zones A and B Resolution J Swing 16 When Step Bt X1 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt 2 2 2 2 b k 6 amp 6 CON EONA T yc No Swing l h6 h6 La Resolution A Swing 16 When Step Bt X2 dod amp a Load N y a b y ua o tp u t 16 Resolution Swing 16 When Step Bt X4 Step 1 E eee a eee eee ee ere ee renee E S E Sy Swing Step sequencer settings in Combination mode Step sequencer settings in Combination mode In Combination mode timbre 16 is used by the step sequencer It will be used if the COMBI gt PROG page STEP
298. tton once again to confirm it ENTER button If the parameter item is a toggle option button or check box press the ENTER button to switch the setting Other CATEGORY dial SELECT dial Parameters indicated by category select icon can be edited using the CATEGORY dial and SELECT dial to change the category and program combination number The dial s LED will light to indicate the current category In Program mode you can select the program category and number In Combination mode these dials have the following two functions e Select the combination category and number e When the edit cell is a timbre program highlighted the dials select the program category and number In Sequencer mode when the edit cell is a track program highlighted the dials select the program category and number Tempo input TEMPO knob TAP button You can set the tempo by turning the TEMPO knob or by repeatedly pressing the TAP button Compare Undo function Program Combination mode Use this when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a program or combination s sound with the un edited original i e the sound that is written into memory While editing a program or combination you can turn on the Compare function select the check mark to recall the settings that were last written to that program number or combination number When you turn off the Compare function remove the check mark you will return to the s
299. tton once again to stop the button will be unlit N The drum loop pattern that s saved together with the program or combination sound will play Note The on off state of the RUN button is not saved when you write the program Entering a pattern 1 Press the STEP SEQ button to make the button blink Buttons 1 16 will turn each of the step sequencer s steps on off Use the BANK button and buttons 1 16 to enter steps Each time you press a button it will turn on lit or off unlit if itis on sound will be produced To enter other tones hold down the SETUP button and press buttons 1 12 to switch tones Then press buttons 1 16 to turn them on off To add accents hold down the SETUP button and press button 13 to select it then use the BANK button and buttons 1 16 to turn the accent on off for each step N w A Synchronizing the step sequencer The step sequencer will play in synchronization with the internal external MIDI clock Synchronization with the arpeggiator The step sequencer will synchronize to the timing of the currently playing arpeggiator Note Ifyou want to synchronize the arpeggiator playback to the step sequencer that s currently running turn Key Sync P ARP gt SETUP C ARP gt A B S ARP gt A B off Synchronization with the Drum Track In Sequencer mode the step sequencer will synchronize to the Drum Track pattern that s currently playing Note If you want to
300. uce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Next select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example in a guitar sound program where you want to use the modulation wheel to control the feedback you would select assignments where the modulation wheel controls the filter frequency and resonance Controller Setup page For each program the function of the SW1 and SW2 buttons can be assigned in the P INPUT CTRL gt CONTROLLERS page For details please see Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 on page 39 Detailed Editing with Programs Controlling Pitch Controlling Pitch Pitch Bend Pitch bend smoothly changes the pitch upward or downward similar to how a guitarist can bend strings On the KROSS you can use the pitch bend wheel to control this in real time The amount of pitch change applied when you move the pitch bend wheel fully toward yourself or fully away from yourself is specified in semitone steps by the Bend and Bend settings For example if Bend is set to 12 moving the pitch bend wheel fully away from yourself will make the pitch rise one octave EDT eas lt moo X PORTA A OSC 44 1 Octave 018 Transpose 00 Tune 8006 Offset 00 6 H2 CONTROLLER Bend Pitch Slope 1 6 Bend 02 Ribbon 16 02 AMS DB Off 86 06 Note
301. um track pattern that s currently playing uncheck the Key Syne setting In this case the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat of the drum track pattern that s currently playing If you want the drum track pattern to synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running turn on the Sync setting the Trigger parameter of the DRUM TRACK gt PATTERN page of each mode Synchronizing with the step sequencer If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize with the loop pattern being played by the step sequencer clear the Key Sync check box In this case the arpeggiator will synchronize with the beat based on the loop pattern that s currently playing Synchronization between the arpeggiator and sequencer in Sequencer mode If song playback is stopped e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the internal MIDI clock timing While playing back or recording a song The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based on the timing of the song 75 76 Arpeggiator function Synchronization with Song Start e Ifthe arpeggiator is turned on ARP button is on and is running it will reset to the beginning of its arpeggio pattern when a Song Start message is received This is unaffected by the Key Syne setting In Sequencer mode when Key Sync is unchecked and the ARP button is on if you start the arpeggiator by pressing a key during the pre count before recording begins the arpeggia
302. unction and press the OK MENU button 3 Press the OK MENU button The settings will be saved Sequencer Overview About the KROSS s Sequencer The sequencer brings together the KROSS s numerous functions such as its arpeggiator Drum Track Step sequencer high performance effects and controllers allowing you to take advantage of these in a wide range of situations This sequencer is a 16 track MIDI sequencer that can store up to 128 songs and 210 000 MIDI events You can use it to record and play back notes for the internal sound generator as well as for external MIDI sound modules amp h When you turn off the power the settings that were created in Sequencer mode as well as the song data that you recorded will not be backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on an SD card before turning off the power If you wish to write the programs track parameters effects and arpeggiator settings etc that were used for a song as a template song use the Save Template Song function Immediately after the power is turned on the KROSS will not contain any song data so if you wish to play a song on the sequencer you must first load data from an SD card or receive a MIDI data dump from a MIDI filer For details please see page 108 and page 177 of the Parameter Guide Sequencer mode structure Sequencer mode is structured as follows A song consists of tracks 1 16 a tempo track song p
303. use preset drum patterns that cover a wide range of musical styles Preset 001 700 Preset Drum Track patterns The Drum Track pattern will start immediately when you press the DRUM TRACK button or when you play the keyboard after pressing the ON OFF button If you re starting the pattern by playing the keyboard you have the option of starting it by using a specific range of notes or velocities The Drum Track can also play in synchronization with the arpeggiator In Program mode the drum track has a dedicated mixer channel and effect routing allowing you to control the drum track independently from the sound of the program itself In Combination and Sequencer modes the drum track is handled as a conventional timbre or track allowing you to select programs and specify the effect routing in the same way as for conventional timbres or tracks Using the Drum Track function in Program mode Playing and stopping the Drum Track 1 In Program mode select a program see Selecting Programs on page 23 PROG MAIN IONE XMIXERX ARP S fuss PIANO 00 Agoa J 120 00 Kross Grand Piano Sw Octave Down SwW2 Octave Up DRUM TRACK 2 Press the DRUM TRACK button to turn the Drum Track on The ON OFF button will light up or blink depending on the setting Trigger Mode of the program ARI If lit The Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting When you turn it o
304. ust these settings in the C TIMBRE gt MIDI page Timbres that you wish to play from the KROSS s keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will trigger any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel C TIMERE mDr OSC PITaH SGALE TIMBRE O1 gt MIDI Channel Bank Select MSB CEA when EX2 gink Select LSB 000 1 Je 2a 3a 4 a a ed 2 19 1 1 mel 5 a Gch 2 3 4 5 6 7 amp 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 he On some preloaded Combinations Timbres used by the arpeggiator may have their MIDI Channels set to something other than Gch These will be timbres that play only when the arpeggiator is on which is a very useful technique for creating Apreggiator based Combinations For details please see Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes on page 70 In particular note the relationships between arpeggiator A B assignments and the MIDI Channel Bank Select when status EX2 When the Status COMBI gt PROG is set to EX2 these parameters allow you to transmit MIDI Bank Select messages to external MIDI devices MIDI filter settings Adjust these settings in the C MIDI FILTER gt 1 4 pages For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corr
305. uto Punch In Start Measure Auto Punch In End Measure rewriting it with the newly recorded data Loop Loop All Tracks Select this method when you wish to repeatedly record over a specified area of a track while continuing to add data This is suitable for creating drum patterns etc For details please see An example of realtime recording Multi multitrack recording Use MIDI multi track recording if you want to simultaneously record multiple tracks of different channels such as when recording the output of the drum track arpeggiator or Step sequencer functions or when recording from an external multi track sequencer Recording resolution Set the REC Resolution if necessary When you record in real time on a track this parameter specifies how the timing of the recorded MIDI data will be corrected If you want to correct the timing of previously recorded data use the Quantize function see page 16 of the Quick Start Guide Adjust these settings in the SEQ gt REC page Setup 2 126 06 Loor_ H Bai i G Overwrite M Multi REC ee ee ee ee ee For example if REC Resolution is set to J the timing of your realtime recorded notes will be automatically adjusted as shown in section 2 of the following illustration whenever it varies from 8th note intervals If REC Resolution is set to Hi the notes will be recorded with the timing at which you play them An example of realtime recording
306. uttons is remembered even when you switch programs combinations or songs For most of the built in sounds of the KROSS a modulation effect such as chorus is assigned to MFX1 and a reverb type effect to MFX2 This button lets you temporarily cancel these effects in a single action Note This will be on lit when you turn on the power 8 Audioin AUDIO IN button This button selects whether an external audio source connected to the MIC IN or LINE IN jack will be input With the factory default settings turning the AUDIO IN button on lit allows you to input external audio from the MIC IN jack Front and rear panels Front panel If you hold down the EXIT button and press this button the audio input settings page will appear there you can adjust the input gain and level and specify how the sound will be routed to the effects Note This will be off unlit when you turn on the power he If you re not using the input from the MIC IN or LINE IN jacks leave this off unlit 9 Audio recorder Here is where you can control the audio recorder which lets you record and play back your KROSS performance or signal from an external audio input You can execute functions such as play stop or record and adjust various settings for the recorder You ll control the recorder by using the following two buttons in conjunction with the four buttons that are located below the audio recorder setup window that appears when you
307. within the mode By using the EXIT button together with another button you can perform the following functions EXIT button LOCATE button Store a location in Sequencer mode EXIT button FAVORITES button Use the Add to Favorite function EXIT button AUDIO IN Access AUDIO IN quick settings EXIT button value dial Adjust the contrast see below Value dial Edit the value of the parameter edit cell where the cursor is located Tip You can adjust the contrast of the display by holding down the EXIT button and turning the value dial lt gt A Y cursor buttons Use these buttons to move the cursor in the display Move the cursor up down left right to select the parameter that you want to edit Note If the page contains more parameters than can be shown on a single screen a A VW symbol is shown to the left of the screen and you ll be able to scroll the page up down see j Scroll on page 8 You can also use the A Y buttons to increment or decrement the value in steps of 1 see ENTER button and A Y cursor buttons on page 12 13 Step sequencer Favorites Here you can control the step sequencer and the Favorites function The step sequencer lets you easily create drum loop patterns by using buttons 1 16 to turn the notes on off that are played by the kick snare and hi hat etc The Favorites function lets you use buttons 1 16 to instantly recall frequently used programs co
308. www korg co jp English Distributors or http www korg com Connecting via the MIDI connectors You can connect the KROSS to your computer via MIDI by using a commercially available MIDI interface Note For more about MIDI interfaces please see the owner s manual of the MIDI interface that you re using amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may be unable to transmit or receive the KROSS s MIDI exclusive messages Connecting MIDI devices By connecting the KROSS s MIDI connectors to an external MIDI device you can transfer sound settings and performance data such as note messages between your external MIDI device and the KROSS About MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard for exchanging various types of musical data between electronic musical instruments and computers When MIDI cables are used to connect two or more MIDI devices performance data can be exchanged between the devices even if they were made by different manufacturers Controlling an external MIDI tone generator from KROSS If you want to use the KROSS s keyboard chord trigger switches and other controllers sequencer and arpeggiator to play or control an external MIDI sound module use a MIDI cable to connect the KROSS s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your external MIDI sound module MA DI keyboard
309. y editing an event it will no longer be possible to execute Compare to listen to the previous edit If you wish to enter event editing press the OK button To cancel press the CANCEL button You can t undo this operation Are you sure Meaning When you exit recording or event editing in Sequencer mode the memory area for Undo Compare function is not allocated If you wish to keep the data that was just recorded or edited press the OK button If you wish to return to the previous data i e to delete the data that was just recorded or edited press the CANCEL button Meaning When editing in Sequencer mode memory area for Undo Compare function cannot be allocated If you wish to execute the edit press the OK button It will not be possible to undo your edit If you decide not to execute the edit press the CANCEL button e In order to allocate memory area for Undo Compare function delete unneeded data such as songs or tracks We recommend that you data to media before you execute the edit procedure You can use Quick Setting with EXIT AUDIO IN Meaning This is shown at the bottom of the screen in the Audio In page of a program combination or song if the G SET check box is selected In this case the Audio In settings will use the Global mode gt G INPUT CTRL gt AUDIO IN page settings You can hold down the EXIT button and press the AUDIO IN button to access the Audio In Quick Setting dialog box to make
310. y track During playback the exclusive messages you recorded will control the track parameters and effect parameters of the song and can be sent to external MIDI devices GM XG and GS exclusive messages can be recorded on a track but the KROSS s tone generator will not respond to these messages Using realtime controls to record changes in a MIDI track s pan EQ volume and tone adjust By controlling the pan EQ volume and tone adjust parameters during realtime recording you can record these changes so that they will be reflected during playback Use multi track recording if you want to modify the settings of multiple tracks simultaneously Note Controlling these parameters will transmit control change or system exclusive messages In order for this data to be recorded the G MIDI gt FILTER Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive settings must be checked Go to Global mode and verify that these items are checked Note Use Param MIDI Out in G MIDI gt OUT page to specify whether control change messages or system exclusive messages will be transmitted when you edit the Pan CC 10 Volume CC 7 or Send 1 2 level CC 93 and CC 91 parameters Recording internal parameter changes You can use SysEx for automation of internal KROSS effects and Program parameters Here we ll explain how to record internal parameter changes As an example we ll explain how parameter changes recorded on a different track can be
311. yboard tracking re creates this effect by increasing the cutoff frequency of a lowpass filter as you play higher on the keyboard Usually some amount of key tracking is necessary in order to make the timbre consistent across the entire range The KROSS keyboard tracking can also be much more complex since it allows you to create different rates of change over up to four different parts of the keyboard For instance you can e Make the filter cutoff frequency increase very quickly over the middle of the keyboard and then open more slowly or not at all in the higher octaves e Make the cutoff frequency increase as you play lower on the keyboard e Create abrupt changes at certain keys for split like effects How Key Track works Keys and Ramps The keyboard tracking works by creating four ramps or slopes between five keys on the keyboard For details please see How it works Keys and Ramps on page 26 of the Parameter Guide osc 4 1 Bey 50 50 50 Keyboard Track Int tof 00 Int to 00 ft pausi F2 C4 6 37 38 Playing and editing Programs Using the Amp section The Amp section includes controls for volume pan and the driver circuit You can control the volume using the Amp EG LFO 1 2 Key Track and velocity along with other AMS sources Each Oscillator has its own Amp section Amp for OSC1 and Amp2 for OSC2 P aAmP BASIC osc 4 1 Amp Level Pan CO64 oe AMS R Note Numbe
312. ync setting 3 Specify the Sync setting Off unchecked The Drum Track pattern will not synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running but will start immediately On checked The Drum Track pattern will synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running 4 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger specify the Latch setting Latch specifies whether the Drum Track pattern will continue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard Off unchecked If the DRUM TRACK button is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will stop when you release the keyboard note off On checked If the DRUM TRACK button is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will continue when you release the keyboard note off The pattern will stop when you turn the DRUM TRACK button off the LED will go dark 5 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger specify the Keyboard Zone and Velocity Zone These settings specify the range of keys and velocities that will trigger the Drum Track pattern when you play the keyboard or receive a note on Saving the on off status If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger the drum track s on off status can be saved in the program If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately the drum track s on off status will always be saved as

KROSS Operation Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents